0% found this document useful (0 votes)
27 views262 pages

MVS-6000 System: (With CCP-9000 Series Center Control Panel)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 262

MVS-6000 System

(With CCP-9000 Series Center Control Panel)

User’s Guide

Multi Format Switcher System


Volume 3 [English]
1st Edition
Software Version 8.00 and Later
NOTICE TO USERS
© 2009 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This
manual or the software described herein, in whole or in
part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to
any machine readable form without prior written approval
from Sony Corporation.

SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY


WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE
OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND
HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO
THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER
INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY
CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE
THEREOF.

Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any


modification to this manual or the information contained
herein at any time without notice.
The software described herein may also be governed by
the terms of a separate user license agreement.
<Organization of This User's Guide>
The User’s Guide for this system comprises Volumes 1 to 3.

Volume 1
The volume comprises the following chapters.
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Chapter 4 Keys
Chapter 5 Wipes
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Appendix (Volume 1)
• Wipe Pattern List
• DME Wipe Pattern List
• Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
• Menu Tree
Index

Volume 2
The volume comprises the following chapters.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Chapter 12 External Devices
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Chapter 16 Macros
Chapter 17 Files
Appendix (Volume 2)
• SpotLighting
• Functional Differences With Models of DME
• Macro File Editing Rules
• About the Macro Attachment List Display
• Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro
Index

Volume 3
This book. For the contents of this volume, see “Table of Contents” at the front.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)
Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

3
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)
Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote
Panel
Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS
Appendix (Volume 3)
• Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
• Error Messages
Index

4
Table of Contents

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Setup for the Whole System.........................................................................13


Network Settings (Network Config Menu).................................................14
Making the Network Settings................................................................14
System Settings (System Config Menu) ......................................................15
Specifying the Switcher Controlled by the Control Panel ....................15
Specifying the DME Connected to the Switcher...................................16
Enabling the FM Data Port of the Switcher ..........................................17
Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu).................................................18
Setting the Signal Format ......................................................................18
Switching the Input Reference Signal for HD System..........................19
Setting Conversion Formats ..................................................................20
Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format Menu).......................................23
Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)..........................24
Saving and Recalling Setup Data ..........................................................25
Selecting the State at Start-up ...............................................................26
Saving User-Defined Settings ...............................................................27
Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On (Autoload
Function) ....................................................................................27
Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu)...................................................29
Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) .......................30
Installing Software ................................................................................30
Making Settings Required to Use the Software ....................................32
Adding User Texture Patterns ...............................................................35
Saving a Frame Memory Clip With Ancillary Data..............................42
System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)................................................43
Setting the Date and Time .....................................................................43
Using a Memory Card ...........................................................................44
Carrying Out the Primary Setting..........................................................44
Reloading a USB Driver........................................................................45
Initializing the Hard Disk ......................................................................45
Locking the Setup Menu Settings .........................................................46

Table of Contents 5
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)
Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)..........................................54
Panel Setup ............................................................................................54
Interchanging the Bank Order or Disabling Operation .........................55
Assigning Two M/E Banks to One M/E Bank ......................................56
Assigning the Key Delegation in the Downstream Key Control Block
(MKS-8032 DSK Fader Module, Option) .................................57
Linking Switcher Bus and Router Destination......................................58
Linking Transitions Between Keyers ....................................................61
Linking the Next Transition Selection Buttons .....................................61
Selecting the Module to be the Reference for Device Control Block ...62
Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button in the Numeric Keypad
Control Block .............................................................................62
Setting the Assignment of Transition Type Selection Buttons .............64
Setting VTR Operation Button Assignment..........................................65
Setting the Assignment of Macro Operation Buttons ...........................67
Assigning Keys to the DSK1 and DSK2 Buttons in the Downstream Key/
Fade-to-Black Control Block .....................................................67
Assigning Keys to the Independent Key Transition Control Block
(Simple Type) ............................................................................68
Assigning Preview Output to Preview Selection Buttons .....................70
Assigning Functions to the Device Control Block ................................71
Inhibiting Utility Bus and Key Operations............................................73
Assigning Functions to the Menu Control Block Top Menu and User
Preference Buttons .....................................................................74
Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) ....................................................75
Creating Cross-Point Assign Tables......................................................76
Copying Cross-Point Assign Tables......................................................81
Selecting Cross-Point Assign Tables ....................................................82
Exporting Source Names and Destination Names.................................83
Making Settings for Audio Mixer .........................................................84
Assigning a Cross-Point Button to Enable/Disable Side Flags .............85
Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu).......................87
Assigning a Bus to an AUX Delegation Button....................................87
Using the Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control .................88
Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) .....................................93
Assigning Functions to User Preference Buttons..................................93
Assigning a Function to a Memory Recall Button in the Utility/Shotbox
Control Block (MKS-8033 Utility/Shotbox Module, Option)...98

6 Table of Contents
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) .................104
Making Control Panel GPI Input Settings...........................................104
Making Control Panel GPI Output Settings ........................................107
Setting the Control Mode for P-Bus Devices ......................................109
Setting the SCU Editor Panel Port ......................................................109
Making DCU Serial Port Settings .......................................................110
Sharing Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Lists ...............................111
Operation Settings (Operation Menu)......................................................112
Setting the On-Air Tally......................................................................113
Setting the Transition Rate Display Mode ..........................................113
Making Settings Relating to Effects....................................................113
Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed ....................114
Setting the Source and Destination Names .........................................114
Settings for the Wipe Snapshot Menu .................................................115
Setting the Button Operation Mode.....................................................116
Setting Trackball, Joystick, Search Dial, and Double-Click Sensitivity
..................................................................................................117
Specifying Main Split Fader................................................................118
Setting the Macro Execution Mode.....................................................118
Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu)..........................120
Screen Saver Settings ..........................................................................120
Adjusting the Brightness .....................................................................120
Adjusting the Alarms...........................................................................121
Calibrating the Touch Panel ................................................................121
Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are Started.............122
Selecting the Mouse Button Used for Adjusting the Knob Parameters
..................................................................................................122

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) ...............................125


Adjusting the Reference Phase............................................................126
Specifying the Video Switching Timing .............................................126
Setting the Operation Mode ................................................................126
Setting User Regions ...........................................................................128
Assigning PGM/PST Logically to an M/E..........................................129
Setting the Assignments of DME Channels to Use on the Individual M/E
Banks........................................................................................129
Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operation ..........................130
Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) ..........................................................132

Table of Contents 7
Making Phase Adjustment and Through Mode Settings.....................132
Making Video Process Settings...........................................................133
Enabling the Illegal Color Limiter ......................................................133
Setting the Format Converter Inputs ...................................................134
Signal Output Settings (Output Menu) ....................................................140
Assigning Output Signals ....................................................................140
Setting the Output Signal ....................................................................141
Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu) .......................145
Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings.............................................145
Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction
(Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu) ...........................................................148
Switching Video Process Memory On or Off .....................................148
Settings for the Show Key Function....................................................149
Settings for Key Auto Drop Function .................................................149
Automatically Naming and Saving to Frame Memory .......................150
Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings.............................................150
Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu)...................................153
Setting a Cross-Point Button Link.......................................................153
Making Link Table Settings ................................................................155
Linking Cross-Point Buttons and GPI Output Ports ...........................155
Making a Setting for Linking Two M/E Banks...................................157
Making a Link Setting for Key Transition ..........................................158
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) .................160
Making 9-Pin Port Device Interface Settings......................................160
Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings ..................................161
Making Switcher Processor GPI Output Settings ...............................164
Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control............................................166
Setting the Interface Between the DME and the Switcher ..................166
Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys Upon Receiving the Editor
Command .................................................................................168

Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)

Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu).....................................170


Setting the Initial Crop ........................................................................170
Setting an Illegal Color Limit for Matte Signals .................................171
Making DME System Phase Adjustment ............................................171
Setting the TBC Window Center Position ..........................................171
Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu) ...............................173
Adjusting the Monitor Output .............................................................173

8 Table of Contents
Setting the Monitor Output..................................................................174
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) .................175
Making DME GPI Input Settings ........................................................176
Making DME GPI Output Settings .....................................................178

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

Setup Relating to DCU ...............................................................................180


Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu)......................181
Assigning a GPI Input Port .................................................................181
Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Input Port....................................182
GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)...........................................183
Making DCU GPI Input Settings ........................................................183
Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu) .....................................187
Assigning a GPI Output Port...............................................................187
Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Output Port .................................188
GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu) .....................................189
Making DCU GPI Output Settings......................................................189
Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) .......................................192
Making Serial Port Settings.................................................................192
Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial
Port ...........................................................................................194

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

Router Interface Settings (Router Menu) ................................................204


Assigning Switcher Inputs and Outputs to S-Bus Space.....................204
Making an External Box Setting .........................................................205
Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu) ..............................................208
Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu) ................................................................209
Making New Wiring Settings..............................................................209
Changing the Wiring Settings .............................................................210
Deleting Wiring Settings .....................................................................210
Sorting Wiring Settings .......................................................................210
Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu)......................................212
Making New Tally Generation Settings ..............................................212
Modifying Tally Generation................................................................213
Deleting Tally Generation Settings .....................................................213
Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu) ...................................................215
Making New Tally Copy Settings .......................................................215
Modifying Tally Copy Settings ...........................................................216

Table of Contents 9
Deleting Tally Copy Settings ..............................................................216
Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu) ..........................................217
Making or Modifying Parallel Tally Settings......................................217
Deleting Parallel Tally Settings...........................................................218
Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu) .................................................219
Setting or Changing the Serial Tally Settings .....................................219
Making the Serial Tally Source Address Settings...............................219
Clearing a Source Address Setting ......................................................220

Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel

Procedure for Simple Connection .............................................................222


Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in Simple Connection..................224

Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS

Checking the Communications Status......................................................226


Communications Status Display .........................................................226

Appendix (Volume 3)

Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define].......................230


Data Saved by [Setup Define] .............................................................231
Data Saved by [Initial Status Define]..................................................236
Error Messages ...........................................................................................239
Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status/Error Log Menu .........239
Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box.....................................244
Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu ......................256

Index ...........................................................................................................258

10 Table of Contents
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)
Setup for the Whole System .......................................................................13
Network Settings (Network Config Menu) ...............................................14
Making the Network Settings ..............................................................14
System Settings (System Config Menu) ....................................................15
Specifying the Switcher Controlled by the Control Panel ..................15
Specifying the DME Connected to the Switcher .................................16
Enabling the FM Data Port of the Switcher ........................................17
Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu) ...............................................18
Setting the Signal Format ....................................................................18
Switching the Input Reference Signal for HD System ........................19
Setting Conversion Formats ................................................................20
Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format Menu) .....................................23
Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu) ........................24
Saving and Recalling Setup Data ........................................................25
Selecting the State at Start-up .............................................................26
Saving User-Defined Settings .............................................................27
Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On (Autoload
Function) ..................................................................................27
Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu) .................................................29
Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) .....................30
Installing Software ..............................................................................30
Making Settings Required to Use the Software ..................................32
Adding User Texture Patterns .............................................................35
Saving a Frame Memory Clip With Ancillary Data ............................42
System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu) ..............................................43
Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................43
Using a Memory Card .........................................................................44
Carrying Out the Primary Setting ........................................................44
Reloading a USB Driver ......................................................................45
Initializing the Hard Disk ....................................................................45
Locking the Setup Menu Settings .......................................................46
Setup for the Whole System

Carry out operations relating to setup for the whole system in the Engineering
Setup menu.
To access the Engineering Setup menu, press the top menu selection button

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


[ENG SETUP].
Here the “whole system” refers to all devices connected on the Control LAN.
The DCU is connected through the control panel, but is also included in the
“whole system.”
For an overview of setup, see “Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).

Setting the unit ID


When there are two switchers and connected DME units on the same network,
it is necessary to set the unit ID on each device, as follows.

Switcher ID
Switcher 1

DME ID
DME1 1
DME2 2

For more details of how to make the unit ID settings, refer to the installation
manual for the particular device.

Setup for the Whole System 13


Network Settings (Network Config Menu)

This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the Data


LAN (excluding the DCU), and displays a list of them.
To make the network settings, use System >Network Config menu.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

To display the Network Config menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF1 ‘Network
Config.’
The status area shows the device ID, and Control LAN and Data LAN IP
addresses for each device excluding the DCU.

Making the Network Settings


1 In the System >Network Config menu, press [Auto Config].
This automatically checks all devices (excluding the DCU) connected to
the Data LAN.

2 Once switch to another menu, then display the Network Config menu
again.
Now the status area of the System >Network Config menu shows the
results of the automatic check.

Note
Be sure to carry out this operation after reconfiguring the system, or after a
software upgrade.

14 Network Settings (Network Config Menu)


System Settings (System Config Menu)

Specify the overall system operation mode and the hierarchical relationship of
the devices.
To make the system settings, use the System >System Config menu.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


To display the System Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF2 ‘System
Config.’

Note
After changing any of the following settings, be sure to press [Execute] to save
the new values. If you want to cancel the setting changes without saving them,
press [Clear].

Specifying the Switcher Controlled by the Control Panel


1 In the System >System Config menu, press the [Panel Assign] button.
The Panel Assign menu appears.

2 Select the switcher to be controlled by the selected control panel, as


follows.
• If there is only one switcher on the network, in the <1st Switcher>
group, set [SWR1] to On, and in the <2nd Switcher> group, set [SWR2]
to Off.
• If there are two switchers on the same network, in the <1st Switcher>
group, select the switcher to be operated.

3 To set the selected control panel as tally control master panel, press [Tally
Master], turning it on.
If there are multiple panels and processors, the control panel for which
[Tally Master] is set to On carries out tally control for the whole system.

Note
When there are multiple control panels, make sure that one of them has
[Tally Master] set to On. When you change the master panel, be sure to
copy and save the setup tally (TLY) and router (RTR) data in the File
menu, and make the same settings for other panels.

System Settings (System Config Menu) 15


To select the lighting mode of the switcher bus selection buttons
on the remote panel
When switching buses with the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel or
other remote panel connected via S-Bus data link, you can select the lighting
mode of the bus selection buttons.
In the System >System Config >Panel Assign menu, select either of the
following in the <S-Bus Remote Sw'er Status> group.
Mode 1: The inhibited buttons do not light even when pressed, and the other
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

buttons light after a longer delay time than in Mode 2.


Mode 2: The delay time for button lighting is reduced, but even the inhibited
buttons may light for a moment when pressed.

Notes
• Make sure that [Tally Master] is set to On.
• When simple connection is used between the center control panel and remote
panel, this setting is disabled.

Specifying the DME Connected to the Switcher


1 In the System >System Config menu, press [Switcher Assign].
The Switcher Assign menu appears.

2 Using either of the following methods, select the switcher to which the
settings apply.
• In the list appearing in the menu, press the desired device name.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
The selected switcher appears in reverse video.
If there is only one switcher on the network, carry out the SWR1 setting
(for the first switcher) only.

3 Make the DME settings as follows.


• When making DME settings for SWR1 (the first switcher), for the
first DME, select [DME1] in the <1st DME> group.Turn all buttons in
the <2nd DME> group off.
• When making DME settings for SWR2 (the second switcher), for the
first DME, select [DME3] in the <1st DME> group. Turn all buttons in
the <2nd DME> group off.

16 System Settings (System Config Menu)


Enabling the FM Data Port of the Switcher
With the FM data port enabled, frame memory data can be transferred in a short
time between the switcher and the control panels.

Note
If multiple control panels are in use, [FM Data Port Enbl] can be turned on for

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


only one control panel per switcher.

1 In the System >System Config menu, press [Switcher Assign].


The Switcher Assign menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the switcher to be set.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

The selected switcher is displayed in reverse video.


If there is only one switcher on the network, make the setting only for
SWR1 (the first switcher).

3 Press [FM Data Port Enbl], turning it on.

System Settings (System Config Menu) 17


Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)

To set the format, that is, the frame frequency and number of scan lines handled
by each device, use the System >Format menu.

To display the Format menu


Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF3 ‘Format.’

Note
After changing any of the following settings, be sure to press [Execute] (or [FC
Format Execute] for changing the format converter signal format) to save the
new values. If you want to cancel the settings and return to the original state,
press [Clear] without pressing [Execute] or [FC Format Execute]. When you
press [Execute], some data is lost (such as frame memory images). If you press
[FC Format Execute], memory is not initialized, and this data is not lost.

Setting the Signal Format


Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices.
The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows.

System Field frequency Effective number of scan lines


HD system 50 1080i
59.94
50 720P
59.94
SD system 59.94 480i
50 576i

To use the MVS-6000 with multi-format support requires the optional BZS-
6540M Switcher Upgrade Software.

The following software options are also required depending on the number of
M/E banks.

Product name Model No. System


Mix/Effect Upgrade Software BZS-6550M 2M/E system
Additional M/E Software BZS-6300 2M/E system

To use the software, you are required to input an install key.

18 Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)


For the method of inputting an install key, see “Making Settings Required to
Use the Software” (page 32).

1 In the System >Format menu, select the device for operations.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Selection of device for operations 1 and upwards

2 Press [Signal Format].


A pop-up window appears.

3 Press the button for the desired signal format.

Switching the Input Reference Signal for HD System


This changes the input reference signal.
• Tri Sync: tri-level sync for an HD system
• BB (Black Burst): black burst or sync for an SD system
The following table shows the relation between signal format and the
frequency of a signal that can be used as the input reference signal.

Signal format Input reference signal


Tri Sync Black burst
1080i/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94
1080i/50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50
720P/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94
720P/50 – Black Burst 50 Sync 50

Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu) 19


Setting Conversion Formats
Installing the MKS-8450G Format Converter Board in the MVS-6000 enables
signal video format conversions.
This operation is valid only when BB is selected in the <Ref Input Format>
group.

Format converter
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Installing the MKS-8450G Format Converter Board in the switcher enables the
following signal video format conversions.
• Up-conversion: from SD (4:3) to HD (16:9)
• Down-conversion: from HD (16:9) to SD (4:3)
• Cross-conversion: from HD (720P) to HD (1080i), or from HD (1080i) to
HD (720P)
The maximum number of input signals for which format conversion is possible
is 8, and the maximum number of output signals is 2.

Notes
• After format conversion, input and output signals have one-frame delays
with respect to the reference signals.
• It is not possible to apply the safe title function to output signals subjected to
format conversion.
• When the input reference signal for HD system is set to Tri Sync, the format
converter function is not available.
For details, see “Switching the Input Reference Signal for HD System”
(page 19)

20 Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)


Format combinations allowing conversion
The supported combinations of switcher signal format and format converter
(inputs 1 to 8) are as follows.
Switcher signal format Format converter signal format setting
setting
FC Input 1-8 FC Output 1, 2
480i/59.94 720P/59.94 Format selected for FC
1080i/59.94 Input 1-8

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


576i/50 720P/50
1080i/50
720P/50 576i/50
1080i/50
720P/59.94 480i/59.94
1080i/59.94
1080i/50 576i/50
720P/50
1080i/59.94 480i/59.94
720P/59.94

1 Display the System >Format menu.

2 Use the methods described in step 1 in “Setting the Signal Format” (page
18) to select SWR1.

3 Press [FC Input 1-8 Format].


A pop-up window appears.

Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu) 21


Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

4 Press the button for the desired signal format.

22 Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)


Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format
Menu)

Switch the screen aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9.


To set the screen aspect ratio, use the System >Format menu.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


Setting the screen aspect ratio
1 In the System >Format menu, press [Aspect].
The Aspect menu appears.

2 In the <Screen Aspect> group, select one of the following.


• 16:9
• 4:3
• Independ: Set the screen aspect ratio separately for M/E, P/P, and USER
on the switcher, and for each channel independently on the DME.

3 If you selected [Independ] in step 2, select from the following.


Switcher Aspect: Make the setting for the switcher.
DME Aspect: Make the setting for the DME.

A menu appears according to the selection.

4 Carry out either of the following, depending on the selection you made in
step 3.
When you selected [Switcher Aspect]: In each of the <M/E-1>, <M/E-
2>, <M/E-3>, <P/P>, and <USER> groups, select either [16:9] or
[4:3].
When you selected [DME Aspect]: For each of the <CH1> to <CH4>
groups, select either [16:9] or [4:3].

5 To confirm the above setting, press [Aspect Execute].


To cancel the setting and return to the original state, press [Clear] without
pressing [Aspect Execute].
When you press [Aspect Execute], a confirmation message appears.

6 Press [Yes].
This saves the screen aspect ratio setting.

Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format Menu) 23


Selecting the State After Powering On (Start
Up Menu)

Set the initial state of the devices when the system is powered on.
For each device, you can select Resume mode or Custom mode.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Resume mode
This resumes the setting state at the previous power-off operation. This setting
is only available for the switcher processor and panel.

Custom mode
This uses the settings saved in non-volatile memory or ROM within the device.
In this mode, there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set
separately.
• Setup mode: Select the setup state to be used after powering on from the
following.
User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Setup Define].
Factory: Start up with the factory default settings.
• Initial status mode: Select the state of each device after powering on
(excluding the settings to which “setup” applies).
User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Initial Status
Define]. For the control panel, this applies to the key bus delegation
buttons only.
Factory: Start up with the factory default settings.
For details of saving and recalling setup data, see “Saving and Recalling Setup
Data” (page 25) and the appendix “Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial
Setup Define]” (Volume 2).

Autoload function
Switch on or off the function to automatically load predetermined register data
or frame memory image data at power on. Set the data to be read in the File
menu.

24 Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)


Saving and Recalling Setup Data

Hard disk / memory card


User setup data

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


Load Save

File menu: File menu:


[Load] [Save]

RAM
Current setup data
(If in Resume mode, settings data is saved.)

Store Initialize
In Custom mode, power on
or reset Setup
Setup menu: menu:
[Setup Define] [All Clear]

Non-volatile memory ROM


User setup data Factory default setup data

Concept of saving and recalling setup data

Updating the switcher or control panel setup data saves the updated setup data
in RAM in each device.
• In Resume mode (see page 24), even if devices are reset or powered off, the
data is preserved in RAM, and recalled when the power is turned back on.

Note
The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs.

• In Custom mode (see page 24), the user-defined settings (user setup data)
saved in non-volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in

Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu) 25


each device is recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on.
(See “Selecting the State at Start-up” (page 26).)
Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel hard disk
or memory card.

To set the initial state at start-up, use the System >Start Up menu.

Note
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

It is not possible to set the DCU state at start-up, but its settings can be saved
in the control panel.

To display the Start Up menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF4 ‘Start Up.’
The status area shows the current start-up mode settings of each device.

Selecting the State at Start-up


1 In the status area of the System >Start Up menu, select the device to which
the settings are to apply.

2 In the <Start Up Mode> group, select one of the following modes.


Resume: When this is on, Resume mode is enabled.
Custom: When this is on, Custom mode is enabled.
For information about Resume mode and Custom mode, see “System
Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).

Note
The Resume mode is only valid when a switcher or control panel is
selected for the setting.

3 When Custom mode is selected, in each of the <Setup> group and <Initial
Status> group, select one of the following.
User: When this is on, user-defined settings are used for the Setup or
Initial Status settings. For the method of saving the user-defined
settings, see the next item.
Factory: When this is on, factory default settings are used for the Setup or
Initial Status settings.

4 To confirm the settings, press [Execute]. If you want to cancel the setting
changes without saving them, press [Clear].
When [Execute] is pressed, a confirmation message appears.

26 Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)


5 Select [Yes].
The start-up state settings are saved.

Saving User-Defined Settings

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


Saving the Setup settings
1 After selecting the devices to which the settings apply to, in the System
>Start Up menu, press [Setup Define].
A confirmation message appears.

2 Press [Yes].
This saves the setup settings for the selected devices in non-volatile
memory within the respective devices.
For details about the settings which will be saved, see“Data Saved by
[Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]” (page 230).

Saving the Initial Status settings


1 After selecting the devices to which the settings apply to, in the System
>Start Up menu, press [Init Status Define].
A confirmation message appears.

2 Press [Yes].
This saves the initial status settings other than the “setup” settings for the
selected devices in non-volatile memory within the respective devices.
For details about the settings which will be saved, see “Data Saved by
[Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]” (page 230).

Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power


On (Autoload Function)
To have specified data read in at power on, in the System >Start Up menu,
press [Power On File Load], turning it on.
This enables the autoload function.

Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu) 27


When the autoload function is enabled, a directory “PWON_LD” appears in
the corresponding File menu.
About saving data which can be loaded by the autoload function, see “Saving
Files Recalled by Autoload” in Chapter 17 (Volume 2).
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

28 Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)


Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu)

To carry out a reset or memory initialization for a device, use the System
>Initialize menu.
• Reset: Reset to state after powering on.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


• All Clear: Clear the memory, and carry out initialization. The Network
Config, System Config, Format, and Start Up setup values are set by
reference to data stored in non-volatile memory, and the system
automatically starts up. It is not necessary to reset the Date/Time settings.
For more details, see “Saving and Recalling Setup Data” (page 25).

To display the Initialize menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF5 ‘Initialize.’
The status area shows the current start-up mode settings.

Resetting the device and initializing memory


1 In the status area of the System >Initialize menu, select the device to which
the settings are to apply.

2 In the <Initialize> group, select one of the following modes.


Reset: Reset the device.
All Clear: Initialize memory.

3 Press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears.

4 Select [Yes].
Depending on the selection in step 2, the following is the result.
• When you selected [Reset], a reset is applied to the device causing it to
be restarted in the start-up state.
• When you selected [All Clear], all memory in the device is cleared,
including snapshots, keyframe effects, setup, and so on, and the device
returns to its factory default settings. However, the Network Config,
Format, Start Up, and Date/Time settings are not initialized.

Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu) 29


Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit
Config Menu)

To install software or firmware in a device, use the System >Install/Unit


Config menu.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

This installs the software and firmware in all devices (including the DCU)
connected to the Data LAN.

To display the Install/Unit Config menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF6 ‘Install/Unit
Config.’
The status area shows the version of the software and the firm ware installed in
each device.

The following functions are available here.


Install: Automatically detects the software that can be installed on each device,
and installs the selected software.
Detail Information: Gives details of the software and firmware installed in
each device.
Unit Config: Carries out switcher processor settings. Selects whether or not to
save frame memory clips with ancillary data.
License: Makes the license valid or invalid.

Displaying installation details


In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, press [Detail Information].
This accesses the Detail Information menu, and displays the detailed
information on the software and firmware installed in the currently selected
device.

Installing Software
1 Insert the memory card holding the software into the memory card slot.

2 In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, press [Install].


The Install menu appears; the status area shows the following information.
Upper list: For each connected device, this shows the device name,
current software version (Current), and the latest version that can be
installed (Install, Title).

30 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


OK: Installation already completed.
On: For installation, but not completed.
Error: An error occurred during installation.
Cancel: Installation canceled.
Lower list: For the device selected in the upper list, this shows an
automatically detected list of software that can be installed on the
particular device. Also, software selected as a candidate for
installation in the upper list is marked in the lower list with an bullet.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


3 If you are satisfied with the currently installed version of all items in the
upper list, skip to step 6.
To change the items to be installed, use any of the following methods to
select the relevant device.

• Press directly on the list in the status area.


• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Device selection 1 and upwards

The display of the lower list changes according to the selected device.

To display all related software


Press [Display All Software], turning it on.
Not just the automatically detected software, but the names of all related
software for the selected device appear.

4 In the lower list, select the software you want to install.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 No Software selection 1 and upwards

5 Press [Set].
The selection is reflected under “Install” and “Title” in the upper list.

6 Press [Install].
The “Install” box shows “On,” confirming that this is to be installed. To
cancel this installation setting, press “Install” once more, making the box
blank.

Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) 31


7 Repeat steps 3 to 6, to confirm all software to be installed.

8 Press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears.

9 Press [Yes].
This carries out the installation, and when it completes normally, the
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

“Install” box shows “OK.”

Making Settings Required to Use the Software


To use the software listed below, you are required to enter an install key which
validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key
is not required.)
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.
To obtain a key, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install/Unit
Config menu of the switcher, using the following procedure.
BZS-6250 Simple P/P Software
BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000)
BZS-8050 Editing Control Software a)
BZS-6420 Color Corrector Software
BZS-6300 Additional M/E Software
BZS-6540M Switcher Upgrade Software
BZS-6550M Switcher Upgrade Software
BZDM-8560 DME Upgrade Software b)

a) This can be used only with a CCP-9000A series control panel.


b) This can be used only on the MVE-8000A.

To display the unique device ID

1 In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, use either of the following


methods to select the device for which you want to register the license.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

2 Press [License].
The License menu appears as follows.

32 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


Device name

Unique device ID

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


Whether or not software licensed

List of software option model names and numbers

Entering the install key


When you have the install key, carry out the following procedure.

1 In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, use either of the following


methods to select the device for which you want to register the license.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

2 Press [License].
The License menu appears.

3 Press directly on the name of the software you want to license (the
Condition box is blank).

Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) 33


4 Press [License Management].
The License Management menu appears.

5 Press [Activate License].


A keyboard window appears.

6 Enter the 16-character install key you have been given, and press [Enter].
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

A license registration completed message appears.

7 Press [OK].
The status area Condition box shows “Active.”

8 Using either of the following methods, restart the device.


• In the System >Initialize menu, with only the device for which you
registered the license being selected, press [Reset] in the <Initialize>
group and then press [Execute].
• Power off and on again.

After restarting, the licensed software is now available for use.

(In case it becomes necessary to cancel the license registration, you can use the
following procedure.)

To cancel the license registration

1 In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, use either of the following


methods to select the device for which you want to cancel the license
registration.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

2 Press [License].
The License menu appears.

3 Press directly on the name of the software for which you want to cancel the
license registration (the Condition box shows “Active”).

4 Press [License Management].


The License Management menu appears.

5 Press [Deactivate License].

34 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


A confirmation message appears.

6 Press [Yes].
A license registration canceled message appears.

7 Press [OK].
The status area Condition box showing “Active” changes to blank.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


8 Using either of the following methods, restart the device.
• In the System >Initialize menu, select only the device for which you
registered the license, and press [Reset] in the <Initialize> group.
• Power off and on again.

After restarting, the software for which the license registration has been
canceled is no longer available.

Adding User Texture Patterns


You can add user created texture patterns to the repertory of texture patterns
with which the spotlighting function enables the light falls on the image
surface.

Notes
• This function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• The MKS-6470 does not support this function.
For details of spotlighting and texture patterns, see “Spotlighting Settings” in
Chapter 11 (Volume 2).

The procedure for adding a texture pattern is as follows.

Prepare the texture file (next item)


m
Create the texture package (page 38)
m
Install the texture package (page 40)

To prepare a texture file


Create a texture file meeting the following conditions, and save it on a memory
card.
File format: Windows bmp (“bitmap”) (extension: bmp, 24-bit RGB)

Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) 35


File name: alphanumeric (maximum 8 characters) + extension (bmp)
Example: wood_01.bmp
Image size (horizontal × vertical): 128 × 128 to 1024 × 1024 pixels

The maximum number of texture files that can be handled by the system is
related to the image size of the texture files, as shown in the following table
(when all images are the same size).

Maximum number of texture files handled


Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Dimension (horizontal) 128 pixels 256 pixels 512 pixels 1024 pixels

Dimension (vertical)
128 pixels 64 32 16 8
256 pixels 32 16 8 4
512 pixels 16 8 4 2
1024 pixels 8 4 2 1

Notes
• Different image sizes can be combined, but this affects the total number of
texture files that can be handled.
• The number of texture files that can be handled may be reduced, depending
on the way in which they are stored in memory (see “Texture Package
menu” (page 36)).
• For a texture file with an image size outside the specification, the minimum
enclosing image size is applied (see table above), and the region below and
to the right is filled with black.
Example: a 300 × 200 pixel texture file is treated as 512 × 256 pixels.

512
300
200
256

Texture Package menu


To create user texture patterns, use the Texture Package menu.

36 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


1 The rest of the capacity
2 Texture number list
3 Directory selection button
4 Texture file list

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


8 Make Package
button
7 Delete button
6 Select button
5 Grid display of memory capacity

a The rest of the capacity (available memory space)


This shows an available memory space in units of 128×128 pixels (a maximum
of 64 units of memory space is available).

b Texture number list


This shows the texture numbers (101 to 164) registered in the texture package.
The list Capacity shows the file size in units of 128×128 pixels (a total
maximum of 64 units of texture files can be registered).

Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) 37


c Directory selection button
By pressing this button to display the popup window, you can select a directory
on the memory card.

d Texture file list


This shows the texture files stored on the memory card.
If a texture file is stored in a directory, press the directory selection button and
select the directory in the popup window, to show a list of files.
The list Capacity shows the file size in units of 128×128 pixels.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

e Grid display of memory capacity


This shows how the texture files are stored in memory (an 8×8 grid, of 64
squares, each equivalent to 128×128 pixels).
And this shows the location where the texture files are stored in memory by
bold frames. The grid for the texture file selected in the texture number list is
shown in amber.

f Select button
Pressing this button assigns the texture file selected in the texture file list to the
number selected in the texture number list.

g Delete button
Pressing this button deletes the texture file assigned to the number in the
texture number list.

h Make Package button


Pressing this button creates the texture package.

Creating a texture package


To use a user-provided texture pattern with the spotlighting function, it is
necessary to convert the texture files to vector files for bump mapping. This
operation is referred to as “creating a texture package.”

1 Insert the memory card holding the texture file into the memory card slot.

2 In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF6 ‘Install/Unit
Config.’
The Install/Unit Config menu appears; the status area shows the version
information for the software installed on the various devices.

3 Using any of the following methods, select a DME for which the
spotlighting license is valid.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

38 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


• Turn the knob.

4 Press [Texture Package].

Note
If you select a device for which the spotlighting license is not enabled, then
[Texture Package] is not enabled.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


The Texture Package menu appears.
For details of the Texture Package menu, see page 36.

5 In the texture number list, select the number for which you want to register
the texture package, by any of the following methods.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Texture No Texture number selection 101 to 164

6 In the texture file list, select the texture file by any of the following
methods.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values

2 No Texture file selection 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of the setting values depends on the number of saved files on a memory card.

7 In the <Texture Pattern> group, press [Select].


This assigns the texture file selected in step 6 to the number selected in step
5, and updates the texture number list.
The grid display of memory capacity shows the location where the texture
files are stored in memory by bold frames. The grid portion for the texture
file selected in the texture number list is shown in amber.

8 Repeat steps 5 to 7, to assign all of the texture files to texture packages.

Notes
• If you assign a texture file that is already in the texture number list to a
different texture number, then the previous assignment is deleted. (It is

Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) 39


not possible to assign the same texture file to two or more different
texture numbers.)
• In the following cases, texture file assignment is not possible.
– If there is no available memory space (“The rest of the capacity:0”
appears)
– If the selected texture file is too large to fit in the available memory
space

To delete a texture file assignment


Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Select the texture file (multiple selections are not possible) you want to
delete in the texture number list, and in the <Texture Pattern> group press
[Delete].

9 To create the texture package, press [Make Package].


A confirmation message appears.

10Select [OK].
The texture package is created in the same location that the texture file is
stored on the memory card (extension: zsp, file name generated
automatically).

Notes
• If you remove the memory card on which the texture file is stored, it is
not possible to create the texture package.
• If a texture package is already present on the memory card, it is
overwritten by a new texture package.
• If you carry out steps 9 and 10 without having assigned even one texture
file, it is not possible to create a texture package.
• If there is insufficient space on the memory card to store the texture
package, an error message appears, and the process is aborted. If this
happens, delete unwanted files from the memory card using your
computer, so that there is enough free space on the memory card, and
repeat the process. (As a guide, the space required is approximately
equal to total number of bytes of the texture files assigned in steps 5 to
8.)

Installing the texture package


1 Insert the memory card holding the texture package into the memory card
slot.

2 In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF6 ‘Install/Unit
Config.’

40 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


The Install/Unit Config menu appears; the status area shows the version
information for the software installed on the various devices.

3 Press [Install].
The System >Install/Unit Config >Install menu appears; the status area
shows the following information.

Upper list: For each connected device, this shows the device name,

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


current software version (Current), and the information about the
texture package that can be installed (Install, Title).
OK: Installation already completed.
On: For installation, but not completed.
Error: An error occurred during installation.
Cancel: Installation canceled.
Lower list: For the device selected in the upper list, this shows an
automatically detected list of software that can be installed on the
particular device. Also, software selected as a candidate for
installation in the upper list is marked in the lower list with an asterisk.

4 Using any of the following methods, select in the upper list a DME for
which the spotlighting license is valid.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Device selection 1 and upwards

5 Press [Display All Software], turning it on.


The lower list shows the texture packages.

6 Using any of the following methods, select the texture package you want
to install from the lower list.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 No Package selection 1 and upwards

7 Press [Set].
The selection is reflected under “Install” and “Title” in the upper list.

Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) 41


8 Press [Install].
The “Install” box shows “On,” confirming that this is to be installed. To
cancel this installation setting, press “Install” once more, making the box
blank.

9 To carry out the installation, press [Execute].


A confirmation message appears.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

10Select [Yes].
This carries out the installation, and when it completes normally, the
“Install” box shows “OK.”

Saving a Frame Memory Clip With Ancillary Data


1 In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, select [SWRx], and press [Unit
Config].
The Unit Config menu appears.

2 Press [FM Ancillary], turning it on.


On: Save with ancillary data.
Off: Save without ancillary data.

Note
Enabling this selection by pressing [Execute] in the following step
reinitializes all frame memory data. Make backups of required data
beforehand.

3 Press [Execute].
A popup window appears, displaying a message.

4 Check the message, and select [Yes].

42 Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)


System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)

• Date and time setting


• Formatting a memory card
• Primary settings for USB external storage device
• Reloading a USB driver

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


• Formatting the hard disk
• Locking setup menu operations
– For each VF button group, selecting a set of candidate menus to be locked,
then locking all of the candidates using a password. Except for list
scrolling, moving menus, and similar operations, menu operations for all
settings can be locked.
– Changing the password

To display the Maintenance menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF7 ‘Maintenance.’
In the status area, the current date and time, and details of the memory card
appear.

Setting the Date and Time


For system date and time settings, use the following procedure.

1 In the System >Maintenance menu, turn the knobs to set the following
parameters.
Parameter group [1/2]

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Hour Hour 0 to 23
2 Min Minute 0 to 59
3 Sec Second 0 to 59

Parameter group [2/2]

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Month Month 1 to 12
2 Day Day 1 to 31
3 Year Year 2000 to 2037

The set date and time appears in the “Set” box in the status area.

System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu) 43


2 Press the [Set Date/Time] button.
This sets the current time to the date and time set in step 1, and the setting
in the “Current” box of the status area changes accordingly.

Using a Memory Card


Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Displaying memory card information


1 Insert the memory card into the memory card slot.

2 In the <USB Storage Device> group of the System >Maintenance menu,


press [Refresh].

Formatting a memory card

Note
Format a memory card before using it for the first time.

1 Insert the memory card in the memory card slot.

2 In the System >Maintenance menu, using either of the following methods,


select the USB device.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

3 In the <USB Storage Device> group, press [Format].


A confirmation message appears.

4 To carry out the formatting, press [YES].


This formats the memory card.

Carrying Out the Primary Setting


To specify a USB device with a storage device connected as a primary device,
use the following procedure.

44 System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)


Note
Without this setting, you cannot use the “Memory Card” item in the File menu
to access a memory card on a storage device connected to the USB device.

1 In the System >Maintenance menu, using any of the following methods,


select the USB device you want to set as primary.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Mount Point USB device selection 1 to 18

2 In the <USB Storage Device> group, press [Set Primary].

Making the primary setting automatic


In the <USB Storage Device> group, press [Auto Detect].

Reloading a USB Driver


To reload a USB driver, in the System >Maintenance menu, press [Reload
USB Driver].

Note
If even after this operation the memory card is not recognized, remove the
memory card and reinsert it, then try again.

Initializing the Hard Disk


If a file system corruption error has occurred on the hard disk, you should
initialize the hard disk.

1 In the <HDD> group of the System >Maintenance menu, press [HDD


Format].

Note
When the hard disk is operating normally, pressing [HDD Format] has no
effect.

An initialization confirmation message appears.

System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu) 45


2 To execute the initialization operation, press [Yes]. To cancel, press [No].
If you have pressed [Yes], the hard disk initialization operation is
executed, and a finished message appears. If you have pressed [No], the
initialization operation is canceled, and the System >Maintenance menu
appears again.

3 Press [OK].
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

The processor is reset.

Locking the Setup Menu Settings


To protect the data, you can inhibit operations in selected setup menus. Use the
following procedure. (It is not possible to lock the Setup Operation Lock
menu.)

1 In the System >Maintenance menu, press [Setup Operation Lock].


The Setup Operation Lock menu appears.

2 In the <VF Group> group, select the group including the desired menu.
The status area shows a list of menu numbers and menu names in the
selected group.
Subsequent lock operations apply within the group selected here.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the menu or the set of menus
as candidates for the locking operation.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Selection of a menu by its number 1 and upwards
in the list
3 Num Selection of number of menus in 1 and upwards
the list

• To select all setup menus within the selected group, press [ALL].

You can also select a menu while it is open. For details, see “Selecting an
opened setup menu for locking” (page 48).

4 Press [Lock Item Select].

46 System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)


This makes the selected menus candidates for locking, and a padlock icon
appears in the “Lock” box (in the unlocked state) .

Note
If there are already one or more locked menus, selection of lock candidates
is not possible.

To deselect a lock candidate

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


After selecting a menu, press [Lock Item Select] once more, to clear the
Lock box.

To deselect all lock candidates in the selected VF group


Press [Lock Item All Clear].

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4, to select all of the lock candidates.

6 Press [Lock].
A keyboard window appears.

7 Enter the password with a maximum of 16 characters, and press [Enter].


If the password is correct, the menus selected in the list of candidates are
all locked. The padlock icon changes to the locked state .

Releasing the lock


When a lock is already applied, use the following procedure.

1 In the System >Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock menu, press [Lock].


A keyboard window appears.

2 Enter the password.


If the password is correct, the lock is released, and the padlock icon
disappears.

Changing the lock password


1 In the System >Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock menu, press [Change
Password].
A confirmation message appears.

2 Press [Yes].

System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu) 47


A keyboard window labeled “Old Password” appears.

3 Enter the old password, and press [Enter].


If the password is correct, a keyboard window labeled “New Password”
appears.

4 Enter the new password, and press [Enter].

5
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

Enter the new password once more, for confirmation.


This sets the new password.

Selecting an opened setup menu for locking


With the menu you want to lock open, press [Lock Item Select] button at the
lower left.

VF button

HF button

Lock Item Select button

The [Lock Item Select] button turns red, and a padlock icon appears.

48 System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)


This selection is reflected in the lock candidate list in the Setup Operation Lock
menu.

Note
If there are already one or more locked menus, selection of lock candidates is
not possible.
In this case, the indication of the [Lock Item Select] button changes as follows.

Chapter 18 System Setup (System)


When the displayed When a menu other
menu is locked than the displayed
menu is locked

If you want to select lock candidates, first remove the lock in the Setup
Operation Lock menu.

System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu) 49


Chapter 18 System Setup (System)

50 System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)


Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)
Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) ........................................54
Panel Setup ..........................................................................................54
Interchanging the Bank Order or Disabling Operation .......................55
Assigning Two M/E Banks to One M/E Bank ....................................56
Assigning the Key Delegation in the Downstream Key Control Block
(MKS-8032 DSK Fader Module, Option) ...............................57
Linking Switcher Bus and Router Destination ....................................58
Linking Transitions Between Keyers ..................................................61
Linking the Next Transition Selection Buttons ...................................61
Selecting the Module to be the Reference for Device Control Block .62
Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button in the Numeric Keypad
Control Block ...........................................................................62
Setting the Assignment of Transition Type Selection Buttons ...........64
Setting VTR Operation Button Assignment ........................................65
Setting the Assignment of Macro Operation Buttons .........................67
Assigning Keys to the DSK1 and DSK2 Buttons in the Downstream Key/
Fade-to-Black Control Block ...................................................67
Assigning Keys to the Independent Key Transition Control Block
(Simple Type) ..........................................................................68
Assigning Preview Output to Preview Selection Buttons ...................70
Assigning Functions to the Device Control Block ..............................71
Inhibiting Utility Bus and Key Operations ..........................................73
Assigning Functions to the Menu Control Block Top Menu and User
Preference Buttons ...................................................................74
Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) ..................................................75
Creating Cross-Point Assign Tables ....................................................76
Copying Cross-Point Assign Tables ....................................................81
Selecting Cross-Point Assign Tables ..................................................82
Exporting Source Names and Destination Names ...............................83
Making Settings for Audio Mixer .......................................................84
Assigning a Cross-Point Button to Enable/Disable Side Flags ...........85
Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu) .....................87
Assigning a Bus to an AUX Delegation Button ..................................87
Using the Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control ...............88
Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) ...................................93
Assigning Functions to User Preference Buttons ................................93
Assigning a Function to a Memory Recall Button in the Utility/Shotbox
Control Block (MKS-8033 Utility/Shotbox Module, Option) .98
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) ...............104
Making Control Panel GPI Input Settings .........................................104
Making Control Panel GPI Output Settings ......................................107
Setting the Control Mode for P-Bus Devices ....................................109
Setting the SCU Editor Panel Port ....................................................109
Making DCU Serial Port Settings .....................................................110
Sharing Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Lists .............................111
Operation Settings (Operation Menu) ....................................................112
Setting the On-Air Tally ....................................................................113
Setting the Transition Rate Display Mode ........................................113
Making Settings Relating to Effects ..................................................113
Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed ..................114
Setting the Source and Destination Names .......................................114
Settings for the Wipe Snapshot Menu ...............................................115
Setting the Button Operation Mode ...................................................116
Setting Trackball, Joystick, Search Dial, and Double-Click Sensitivity
.................................................................................................117
Specifying Main Split Fader ..............................................................118
Setting the Macro Execution Mode ...................................................118
Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu) ........................120
Screen Saver Settings ........................................................................120
Adjusting the Brightness ...................................................................120
Adjusting the Alarms .........................................................................121
Calibrating the Touch Panel ..............................................................121
Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are Started ...........122
Selecting the Mouse Button Used for Adjusting the Knob Parameters
.................................................................................................122

53
Overall Control Panel Settings (Config
Menu)

To carry out the overall control panel settings, use the Panel >Config menu.

To display the Config menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF1 ‘Config.’
The status area shows the “Bank numbers 1 to 4” (physical locations) of the M/
E and PGM/PST banks, the allocated bank names, and whether or not operation
is enabled.

Panel Setup
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

In panel setup, you carry out settings particular to the control panel.
You can make the following settings.

Panel settings (Config)


• M/E Assign: Set the logical configuration of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
• M/E Operation: For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, make operations
possible, not possible, or disabled (Enable/Disable/Inhibit).
• Dual M/E Assign: Using two M/E banks, assign the shift and non-shift
button rows of a single M/E bank.
• Dual M/E Xpt Swap: When a setting has been made for Dual M/E Assign,
swap the shift and non-shift button rows.
• DSK Fader Assign: Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation
for the key delegation buttons, in each of the maximum of four downstream
key control blocks.
• External Bus Link: Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to
routing switcher destinations.
• Key Trans Link: Select whether or not to link transitions between keyers,
and if so which keyer to link to. You can set the links between keyers for each
M/E bank separately.
• Reference Module: When a trackball module and a joystick module are both
connected as device control blocks, select which is used as the reference.
• 10 Key Region Assign: Assign any regions to the region selection buttons
in the numeric keypad control block. Also used for setting the regions
included in the selection when the [All] button is pressed.
• Program Button: Make assignments for buttons of some control blocks
such as assigning the buttons in a transition control block for controlling a
VTR.

54 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


• Compact Key Module Assign: You can select which keys can be operated
with an independent key transition control block (simple type).
• M/E Operation Inhibit: For each M/E or PGM/PST bank, enable or inhibit
utility bus-related and key-related operations.

Interchanging the Bank Order or Disabling Operation


1 In the Panel >Config menu, select the Bank you want to set, using any of
the following methods.
• Press directly on the status area display.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Select the position of the bank you want 1 to 4

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


to set

The Bank selection here indicates the physical position on the control
panel, numbering from the top as the 1st Row, 2nd Row, 3rd Row, and 4th
Row.
On the MKS-9011 1M/E Control Panel only the 1st Row is valid. On the
MKS-9012 2M/E Control Panel, only the 1st Row and 2nd Row are valid.

2 Select the bank that you want to assign to the selected Bank number in the
<M/E Assign> group.
The status area shows the interchanged state of the banks.

Notes
• It is not possible to assign the same M/E logical bank to more than one
physical bank. Be sure to make different M/E assignments.
• When the bank order is changed, the state of region selection button
assignment in the numeric keypad control block also changes
correspondingly.

3 For the selected Bank number, in the <M/E Operation> group, select one
of the following.
Enable: Enable panel display and operation of the bank.
Disable: Enable only panel display, and disable operation of the bank.
Inhibit: Disable both the panel display and operation of the bank.

Note
When this is set to Inhibit, snapshots of the bank are not recalled.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 55


Assigning Two M/E Banks to One M/E Bank
1 In the Panel >Config menu, select the M/E bank for which you want to
make the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Selection of position of bank for which you 1 to 4 a)
want to make the setting

a) Depends on the center control panel configuration. When the bank closest to the operator
(the 4th row of a 4-M/E system) is selected, [Dual M/E Assign] is disabled.

For example, if the furthest bank from you is assigned to M/E-1, and you
want no shift button operation for the bank, select 1 (1st Row) for Bank.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

2 Press [Dual M/E Assign].


This assigns the furthest M/E bank from you to the unshifted (shifted)
cross-points and the M/E bank in front of it to the shifted (unshifted) cross-
points. For fader lever operations, only the M/E bank closer to you is
enabled.
The shift/non-shift assignment is set by [Dual M/E Xpt Swap]. For more
details, see the next section, “Interchanging shifted and non-shifted
operations for a dual M/E.”

To return to the original assignment


Interchange the bank order (see page 55).

Interchanging shifted and non-shifted operations for a dual M/E


1 In the Panel >Config menu, select the M/E bank for which the dual M/E
setting is made.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Bank to be selected for dual 1 to 4 a)
M/E setting

a) Depends on the center control panel configuration.

56 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


2 Press [Dual M/E Xpt Swap], toggling it on or off.
On: The lower M/E bank is non-shifted, and the higher M/E bank is
shifted.
Off: The lower M/E bank is shifted, and the higher M/E bank is non-
shifted.

Assigning the Key Delegation in the Downstream Key


Control Block (MKS-8032 DSK Fader Module, Option)
As an example, to assign key 4 of the M/E-1 bank to key delegation button 1
of the downstream key control block 1, use the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press the [DSK Fader Assign].

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


The DSK Fader Assign menu appears.

2 Directly press on the indications in the status area, to select the


downstream key control block for which you want to make the setting, and
select the key delegation.
Here, press on the intersection of the “1st Module” column and “Key1
Assign” row.

3 In the <M/E Select> group, select the bank of the key you want to assign.
Here, select [M/E-1] as an example.

4 In the <Key Link Select> group, select the key you want to assign.
Here, select [Key4] as an example.

5 To disable the fader lever of the selected downstream key control block,
select [Disable] in the <Fader Assign> group.
To enable the fader lever, select one of the following in the <Fader
Assign> group, determine the key to which the fader lever operation
applies.
All: Key selected with one of the key delegation buttons
Key1: Key assigned to key delegation button 1 ([DSK1] button)
Key2: Key assigned to key delegation button 2 ([DSK2] button)
Key3: Key assigned to key delegation button 3 ([DSK3] button)
Key4: Key assigned to key delegation button 4 ([DSK4] button)

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 57


Linking Switcher Bus and Router Destination
To provide links between the switcher bus and router destination, make the
following settings as required.
Matrix selection: Select the target of link setting from the eight matrices (1 to
8).
Matrix position definition: Set the start address and level for the source and
destination on the S-Bus.
Link table setting: Link a switcher cross-point button and matrix source.
Link bus setting: Link a switcher bus address and router destination.

Selecting a matrix number


1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

2 In the <Link> group, press [External Bus Link].


The External Bus Link menu appears.
The status area shows the current link status.

3 Turn the knobs to select the matrix.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Link No Link number 1 to 64
2 Link Matrix Matrix number 1 to 8

In the status area, the color of the selected part changes.

4 Press [Link Matrix Set].


This confirms the matrix selection and the selected part in the status area
returns to the previous color.

To delete a link
With the link selected, press [Clear].

Defining the position of a matrix


Specify where in the 1024 × 1024 S-Bus space the link matrix is to be provided,
by setting the source and destination start address.
For the matrix selected in the External Bus Link menu, use the following
procedure.

58 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


1 In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link menu,
press [Link Matrix Adjust].
The Link Matrix Adjust menu appears.
The status area shows the status of the currently selected matrix, and a list
of the source and destination start addresses that can be selected.
In this menu too, you can use the knobs to select the link for the setting.

2 Using any of the following methods, define the position of the matrix to be
linked.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Source Source start address 1 to 897
3 Destination Destination start address 1 to 897

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


4 Level Level 1 to 8

3 To confirm a source address selected in step 2, press [Source Set], to


confirm a destination address press [Destination Set], and to confirm a
level press [Level Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.

Setting a link table


For the link selected in the External Bus Link menu, make the settings as
follows.

1 In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link >Link


Matrix Adjust menu, press [Link Table Adjust].
The Link Table Adjust menu appears.
The status area lists the status of the currently selected link, combinations
of video signals and sources, and the sources that can be selected.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the switcher cross-point button
and the matrix source to be linked to the button.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Main No Switcher cross-point button 1 to 128

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 59


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Source No Matrix source selection 1 to 128

3 To confirm the matrix source selection made in step 2, press [Link Source
Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.

4 As required, repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the matrix sources to be linked


to other cross-point buttons.

To initialize the set links


In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link >Link Matrix
Adjust menu, press [Init Link Table].
A confirmation message appears.
Press [Yes].
The links set using the above procedure are initialized to the default settings,
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

and this is reflected in the status area.

Making link bus settings


For the link number selected in the External Bus Link menu, use the following
procedure.

1 In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link menu,


press [Link Bus Adjust].
The Link Bus Adjust menu appears. The status area lists the current link
status, and the switcher buses and router destinations that can be selected.
In this menu too, you can use knob 1 to select the link to be set.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the switcher bus and the router
destination to be linked to the switcher bus.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Internal Bus Switcher bus selection 1 to 128
3 Destination Router destination selection 1 to 128

3 To confirm the bus selected in step 2, press [Master Bus Set], and to
confirm the destination press [Linked Dest Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.

60 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


Linking Transitions Between Keyers
1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 In the <Link> group, press [Key Trans Link].


The Key Trans Link menu appears.
The status area shows the keyers for each M/E bank and the linked keyers.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the keyer to be the master.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


1 Master Key Select keyer to be master 1 to 16

The selected keyer appears in reverse video.

4 In the <Key Select> group, select the keyer to be linked to the transition of
the master.

Note
Linking does not apply to a transition carried out with the downstream key
control block.

Linking the Next Transition Selection Buttons


To the transition links between keyers, you can add a link for the next transition
selection buttons in the transition control block. The effect of this additional
link is such that if for example, two keyers (Key 2 and Key 3) are linked with
the master keyer (Key 1), pressing the [KEY1] next transition selection button
also selects the [KEY2] and [KEY3] buttons.

1 Set the transition links between keyers.


For details of the operation, see the previous section “Linking Transitions
Between Keyers.”

2 Press [Next Trans Link], turning it on.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 61


The [KEY1], [KEY2], [KEY3], and [KEY4] next transition selection
buttons in the transition control block are now selected coupled to the
settings in the Key Trans Link menu for transition links between keyers.

Note
These settings apply to the whole Key Trans Link menu. It is not possible
to make separate settings for each master keyer.

Selecting the Module to be the Reference for Device


Control Block
In the <Reference Module> group of the Panel >Config menu, select the
module to be the reference.
• Trackball
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• Joystick

Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button in the


Numeric Keypad Control Block
A maximum of four regions can be set for a single region selection button in
the numeric keypad control block.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [10 Key Region Assign].


The 10 Key Region Assign menu appears.

62 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


The left side of the status area shows region selection buttons; the upper
part of the right side shows a list of regions assigned to region selection
buttons, and the lower part shows a list of assignable regions.

2 Press the indication of the button for the assignment.


The button you pressed appears in reverse video.

3 Using any of the following methods, select one of the four regions for the
setting.
• Press directly on the list in the upper part of the right side.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor in the list in the
upper part of the right side.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Assign Selection to which setting 1 to 4

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


applies

4 Using any of the following methods, select the region to be assigned.


• Press directly on the list in the lower part of the right side.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor in the list in the
lower part of the right side.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Region Region selection 1 and upwards

5 Press [Set], to confirm the selection.


This assigns the region to the region selection button in the numeric
keypad control block.

Note
Only regions assigned here can be used for keyframe or snapshot recall.
If an M/E bank is not assigned to a region selection button in the numeric
keypad control block, the M/E Flexi Pad control block cannot be used to recall
a snapshot.

To return the region assignment to the factory default state


In the Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu, press [Default].
This returns the assignment of region selection buttons in the numeric keypad
control block to the factory default state.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 63


To delete a region assignment
In step 3 of the procedure “Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button
in the Numeric Keypad Control Block” (page 62), make the selection to which
the operation applies, then press [Clear].
This clears the assignment of the selected region.

Setting the region selection buttons selected when the [ALL]


button is pressed
1 In the Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu, press [All Select] in
the button area, or the [All Select] button indication in the status area,
setting it to On.
The [All Select] button indication in the status area changes to orange, and
the system switches to a mode for assigning region selection buttons to the
[ALL] button. In the factory default state, all buttons appear in reverse
video, and are assigned to the [ALL] button.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

2 If you do not want to assign any region selection button to the [ALL]
button, press the corresponding button indication, setting it to Off.
The button you pressed returns to normal display.

Note
Assignment to the [ALL] button is region by region. Changing the assignment
of a region selection button does not change the regions assigned to the [ALL]
button.

Setting the Assignment of Transition Type Selection


Buttons
You can change the assignment of transition type selection buttons in the
transition control block.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].


The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 Press [Transition Module].


The Transition Module menu appears.

3 Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the <Bank
Select> group.

64 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


The current assignment of the transition type selection buttons appears at
the upper left.

4 Press the transition type selection button for which you want to change the
assignment.
The button you pressed appears in reverse video.

5 Using any of the following methods, select the transition type to be


assigned, from the list on the right.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Selection of transition type 1 to 10
Assign

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


6 Press [Set].
The texts on the button illustrations change to reflect the selection.

To cancel the assignment


Press [Clear].

To make the assignment the default


Press [Default].

Setting VTR Operation Button Assignment


You can change the assignment of some of the buttons in the transition control
block for use in VTR operations.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].


The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 Press [Transition Module].


The Transition Module menu appears.

3 Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the <Bank
Select> group.
In the center on the left, [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] appear with
their current assignments.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 65


On the lower left, [PTN LIMIT], [LIMIT SET], and [KF] appear with their
current assignments.

4 Press any of the [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] buttons.


The three buttons appear in reverse video.

5 Using any of the following methods, select the button functions for the
assignment from the list on the right.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Selection of button functions 1 or 2
Assign

The following are the button functions.


Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Normal/Reverse: Use the respective buttons as a [NORM] button,


[NORM/REV] button, and [REV] button for VTR operations.
Play/Stop/Cue: Use the respective buttons as a [PLAY] button, [STOP]
button, and [CUE] button for VTR operations.

6 Press [Set].
The texts on the button displays change to the selected items.

7 Press any of the [PTN LIMIT], [LIMIT SET], and [KF] buttons.
The three buttons appear in reverse video.

8 Select the button functions for the assignment from the list on the right.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Selection of button functions 1 or 2
Assign

The following are the button functions.


Ptn Limit /KF: Use the respective buttons as a [PTN LIMIT] button,
[LIMIT SET] button, and [KF] button.
Play/Stop/Cue: Use the respective buttons as a [PLAY] button, [STOP]
button, and [CUE] button for VTR operations.

9 Press [Set].

66 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


The texts on the button displays change to the selected items.

To inhibit the button operations


Press [Clear].

To make the assignment the default


Press [Default].

Setting the Assignment of Macro Operation Buttons

Note
This setting is disabled for the CCP-9000/9000A.

To switch the [UNDO] button on a simple type Flexi Pad control block to a
[MCRO] button for macro operation, use the following procedure.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


1 In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button menu, press [Flexi Pad
Module].
The Flexi Pad Module menu appears.

2 Select the assignment of the [UNDO] button in the simple type Flexi Pad
control block from the <UNDO Button Assign> group.
UNDO: use as an [UNDO] button.
MACRO: use as a [MCRO] button.

Assigning Keys to the DSK1 and DSK2 Buttons in the


Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block
It is possible to select the key used for downstream key/fade-to-black control
block operations.

Note
This operation cannot be done in the CCP-9000/9000A.

1 In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button menu, press [DSK/FTB


Module].
The DSK/FTB Module menu appears.
The left side of the status area shows the DSK1 and DSK2 buttons, and the
right side shows a list of keys to be assigned.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 67


2 Press the indication (DSK1, DSK2) of the button for the assignment.
The button you pressed changes to reverse video.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the key to be assigned.


• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Key No Selection of key assigned to 1 to 16
button

4 Press [Set], to confirm the selection.


This assigns the selected key to the key delegation button.

To return the key delegation button assignment to the factory


Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

default state
In the DSK/FTB Module menu, press [Default].
This returns the key delegation assignment to the factory default state.

Assigning Keys to the Independent Key Transition


Control Block (Simple Type)
It is possible to select the keys that can be used in an independent key transition
control block (simple type) operation.

Note
This operation cannot be done in the CCP-9000/9000A.

The control panel comprises a main base for installing the principal switcher
bank control blocks, and an extension section for extended control blocks. The
independent key transition control block (simple type) can be installed in
either, but the assignable keys differ as follows.

When the independent key transition control block (simple type) is


installed in the main base
Select the keys to be assigned from the following.
• Key1,2 (keys 1 and 2)
• Key3,4 (keys 3 and 4)
• DSK1,2 (downstream keys 1 and 2)
• DSK3,4 (downstream keys 3 and 4)
• N/A (no assignment)

68 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


In this case, “Key1,2” and “Key3,4” are the keys of the switcher bank (M/E-1,
M/E-2, M/E-3, PGM/PST) in which the independent key transition control
block is installed and whose assignment is determined by the M/E Assign
menu.

When the independent key transition control block (simple type) is


installed in the extension section
Select the keys to be assigned from the following.
• M/E-1 Key1,2
• M/E-1 Key3,4
• M/E-2 Key1,2
• M/E-2 Key3,4
• M/E-3 Key1,2
• M/E-3 Key3,4
• DSK1,2
• DSK3,4
• Key1,2 1)

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


• Key3,4 1)
• N/A (no assignment)

1) In this case, depending on the switcher extension interface port, operations always apply to the
following.
Ext Port 1: M/E-1
Ext Port 2: M/E-2
Ext Port 3: M/E-3
For the MKS-8010B, operations also apply to an M/E bank assigned to the interface port in the
Extension Panel menu .

To assign a key to the independent key transition control block (simple type),
use the following procedure. Here the example shown is the case in which keys
3 and 4 (“Key3,4”) are assigned to the second row switcher bank of the main
base.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Compact Key Module Assign].


The Compact Key Module Assign menu appears.
The left side of the status area shows data for the main base (physical
layout and switcher bank names and key assignment). The right side shows
the data for the extension section (physical ports and key assignment).

2 Press directly on the display on the left, to select the control block for the
assignment.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 69


Here, press on the intersection of the “2nd Row” column and “Module
Assign” row.

3 In the <Module Assign> group, select the key you want to assign.
In this example, select [Key3,4].

To return the key assignment to the default


In the Compact Key Module Assign menu, press [Default].
This returns all key assignments to their factory default state.

Assigning Preview Output to Preview Selection Buttons


It is possible to assign any preview output to a preview selection button.
This applies to the preview selection buttons in the fade-to-black control block
and the downstream key/fade-to-black control block.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Note
This operation cannot be done in the CCP-9000/9000A.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].


The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 Press [Fade To Black Module].


The Fade To Black Module menu appears.
On the left of the status area, preview selection buttons (1 to 11) appear.
On the right side a list of signals to be assigned appears.

3 In the button indications on the left, press the button for the assignment.

4 Using any of the following methods, select the signal to be assigned.


• Press directly on the list on the right.
• In the list on the right, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Button selection 1 to 20

5 Press [Set].
This assigns the signal selected in the list to the button.

70 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


To cancel an assignment
Select the button, then press [Clear].
This leaves nothing assigned.

To return all preview selection button assignments to the factory


default state
In the Fade To Black Module menu, press [Default].

Assigning Functions to the Device Control Block

Assigning devices or functions to the device selection buttons


and other buttons of the device control block (search dial)
You can assign devices and functions to the device selection buttons, SBOX
buttons and [DELAY] button of the device control block (search dial).

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


For details of the device control block (search dial), see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].


The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 Press [Device Control Module].


The Device Control Module menu appears.
The left of the status area shows the device selection buttons, SBOX
buttons and [DELAY] button of the device control block (search dial). The
list on the right shows the devices and functions that can be assigned.

3 In the button displays on the left, press the button for the assignment.

4 Using any of the following methods, select the device or function to be


assigned.
• Press directly on the list on the right.
• In the list on the right, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Selection of device or 1 and upwards
Function function to be assigned

5 Press [Set].
This assigns the device or function selected in the list to the button.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 71


To cancel an assignment
Select the button, then press [Clear].
This removes the assignment to that button.

To return all device selection button assignments to the factory


default state
In the Device Control Module menu, press [Default].

Assigning devices and functions to the region selection buttons


of the device control block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module,
option)
You can assign devices and functions to the region selection buttons of the
optional device control block (trackball).
For details of the device control block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module,
option), see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].


The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 Press [Joystick/Trackball Module].


The Joystick/Trackball Module menu appears.
The left of the status area shows the region selection buttons of the device
control block. The list on the right shows the devices and functions that can
be assigned.

3 In the button displays on the left, press the button for the assignment.

4 Using any of the following methods, select the device or function to be


assigned.
• Press directly on the list on the right.
• In the list on the right, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Selection of device or 1 and upwards
Function function to be assigned

5 Press [Set].
This assigns the device or function selected in the list to the button.

72 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


To cancel an assignment
Select the button, then press [Clear].
This removes the assignment to that button.

To return all device selection button assignments to the factory


default state
In the Joystick/Trackball Module menu, press [Default].

Inhibiting Utility Bus and Key Operations


You can inhibit operations on the utility bus and keys 1 to 4 of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks by menu operations.
This inhibitions apply for the following control blocks.
• Cross-point control block
• Transition control block

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


• Independent key transition control block 1)

1) Only when the Key1, 2 or Key 3, 4 are assigned by the Compact Key Module Assign menu.

Note
This operation cannot be done in the CCP-9000/9000A.

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [M/E Operation Inhibit].


M/E Operation Inhibit menu appears.

2 In the list in the status area, using any of the following methods, select the
switcher bank for which operations are to be inhibited.
• Press directly on the desired switcher bank in the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Switcher bank selection for 1 to 4
inhibiting operations

3 In the <M/E Operation Inhibit> group, press the utility 2 bus or key button
([Util2 Bus] or [Key1] to [Key4]) for which operations are to be inhibited.

Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) 73


Assigning Functions to the Menu Control Block Top
Menu and User Preference Buttons
To these 41 buttons, you can freely assign a menu recall or user preference
button function.
For details of the menu control block, see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).

1 In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].


The Link/Program Button menu appears.

2 Press [Menu Panel].


The Menu Panel menu appears.
The left side of the status area shows the Top menu selection buttons and
user preference buttons, and the right side shows a list of menus and
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

actions to be assigned.

3 Using any of the following methods, scroll the display.


• Press the arrow keys.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scroll Scroll 1 to 5

4 In the button indications on the left, press the button for the assignment.

5 Using any of the following methods, select the menu or action to be


assigned.
• Press directly on the right list.
• Press the arrow keys on the right list to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Menu/Action Select the menu or action 1 to 40

6 Press [Set].
This assigns the menu or action selected in the list to the button.
To cancel an assignment, select the button, then press [Clear].
To return all button assignments to the factory default state, in the Menu
Panel menu, press [Default].

74 Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)


Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)

To carry out the cross-point settings, use the Panel >Xpt Assign menu.

To display the Xpt Assign menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF2 ‘Xpt Assign.’
The status area shows a list of “cross-point assign tables” to use for the M/E
banks, PGM/PST bank, and various buses.

The following functions are available here.


• Xpt Assign: For each control block or bus, display and set the assignments
to the main table and tables 1 to 14. You can also carry out settings to link
switcher signal selection to the audio mixer.
• Main, V/K Pair Assign: Make cross-point settings for the main table.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


– Assign video/key sources for button numbers 1 to 128.
– For each table, specify whether the rightmost cross-point button in each
row is used as a shift button, and the operation mode when it is used as a
shift button.
– For the [SHIFT] button in the cross-point control block and for each table,
select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source name
displays, or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses.
– Disable cross-point buttons to work.
• Mixer Xpt Assign: Assign audio mixer cross-points to cross-point buttons
in the main table.
• Table Button Assign: Create tables 1 to 14 in the same way as the main
table.
• Src Name: Set source names of up to 16 characters.
• LCD Color: Set the LCD color for source name display.
• Table Copy: Copy table contents from the main table to tables 1 to 14 or
between tables 1 to 14 (it is not possible to copy tables 1 to 14 to the main
table).
• Name Export: This function sends the source name and destination name to
the S-Bus.
• Side Flags Button Assign: Assign the rightmost button in the background
A/B row to the side flag function (inserting a selected image on both sides of
a 4:3 image).

Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) 75


Creating Cross-Point Assign Tables
As cross-point assign tables, you can create a “main” table and up to 14 other
tables (table 1 to table 14). However, you can only carry out assignment of the
video and key combinations in the main table.

Creating the main table


In the main table, a pair consisting of a video signal and a key signal is assigned
to each button number. You can also assign the same signal to another button
number at the same time. Further, you can delete currently assigned signals
from the main table.
To create the main table, use the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table1 (Table2,
Table3, or Table4) menu, press [Main, V/K Pair Assign].
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

The Main, V/K Pair Assign menu appears.


The left of the status area shows the video and key signal names, source
number, and audio mixer cross-points (machine numbers) currently
assigned in the main table. On the right is a list of the source numbers and
signals that can be assigned. When the shift button is pressed, the number
column is distinguished by color.
For details of audio mixer cross-point assignment operations, see “Setting
the audio mixer cross-points” (page 84).

2 Using any of the following methods, select the button number.


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 V/K Pair No Selection of video and key pair number 1 to 128

3 When assigning a video signal, press [Video] in the <Assign> group.


When assigning a key signal, press [Key]. (You can select a video signal
and a key signal at the same time.)

Note
[Video] and [Key] in the <Assign> group cannot be turned off at the same
time. At least the one or the other is always on.

4 Use any of the following methods to select the signal to assign.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.

76 Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Source No Selection of source to be assigned 1 to 128

5 Using the buttons in the <Xpt Assign> group, assign the selected signal to
the button number currently selected in the main table.
Set: Delete the signal currently assigned to the selected button number and
make a new assignment.
Insert: Move down one line the signal currently assigned to the selected
button number and following signals, and make a new assignment.

Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Insert” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


128 cannot be changed. When “Insert” is executed for any other number,
moving down of signals ends at number 120, and the signals assigned to
numbers 121 to 128 are maintained in their original lines.

To disable a button
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair Assign menu, select the button you
want to disable, and press [Inhibit].

To delete any currently assigned signal


In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair Assign menu, select the button
corresponding to the signal you want to delete, and press [Delete] in the <Xpt
Assign> group.
Signal deletion is executed in accordance with the selection in the <Assign>
group, and the signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button
number and following signals move up one line.

Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Delete” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to 128
cannot be changed. When a signal assigned to any other button number is
deleted, moving up of signals ends when the signal assigned to number 120 has
moved to number 119, and the signals assigned to numbers 121 to 128 are
maintained in their original lines.

Creating tables 1 to 14
When creating tables 1 to 14, in the same way as when creating the main table,
you can assign the same signal to more than one button number, or delete

Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) 77


currently assigned signals. However, assignment of video and key
combinations is impossible.

1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, press [Table Button Assign].


The Table Button Assign menu appears.
The table number appears on the upper left part of the status area.
The left part of the status area shows the cross-point button numbers, video
and key pair numbers, video signal source names and source numbers, and
key signal source names and source numbers. When the shift button is
pressed, the number column is distinguished by color.
The right part shows the video and key pair numbers, and the names of
video signals and key signals set in the main table.
The Table Button Assign menu also allows you to access the Main, V/K
Pair Assign menu and the Src Name/LCD Color menu.

2 Using the knob, select the table number.


Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Table No Selection of the table to be set 1 to 14

3 Using any of the following methods, select the button number.


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Button No Cross-point button selection 1 to 128

4 Using any of the following methods, select the pair number.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 V/K Pair No Selection of video and key pair 1 to 128
number to be assigned

5 Using the buttons in the <Button Assign> group, assign the selected pair
number to the button number currently selected in table 1.
Set: Delete the signal currently assigned to the selected button number and
make a new assignment.
Insert: Move down one line the signal currently assigned to the selected
button number and following signals, and make a new assignment.

78 Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)


Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Insert” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to
128 cannot be changed. When “Insert” is executed for any other number,
moving down of signals ends at number 120, and the signals assigned to
numbers 121 to 128 are maintained in their original lines.

To disable a button
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select the button you
want to disable, and press [Inhibit].

To delete any currently assigned signal


In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select the button
corresponding to the signal you want to delete, and press [Delete] in the
<Button Assign> group.
The signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button number
and following signals move up one line.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Delete” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to 128
cannot be changed. When a signal assigned to any other button number is
deleted, moving up of signals ends when the signal assigned to number 120 has
moved to number 119, and the signals assigned to numbers 121 to 128 are
maintained in their original lines.

Returning the table to its default state


1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair Assign menu or Panel >Xpt
Assign >Table Button Assign menu, press [Default Recall].
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to return to the
default state.

2 To return to the default state, press [Yes], and to cancel the operation, press
[No].

Setting the cross-point button shift operation


You can set the operation of the rightmost button in each row of cross-point
buttons excluding the reentry buttons.
In the <Xpt Shift Mode> group of the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair
Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select one of
the following for each cross-point table.

Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) 79


Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted version of the cross-point buttons
is enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted version and the unshifted version.
Off: Acts as a cross-point button, in a 16-button system as button number 16,
in a 24-button system as button number 24, and in a 32-button system as
button number 32.

Setting the action of the [SHIFT] button in the cross-point control


block
In the <Display Shift Mode> group of the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair
Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select either
of the following.
Display: Functions as a shift button dedicated to the source name displays.
Shift All Bus: Functions as a shift button for all buses.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Notes
• It is not possible to make this setting separately for each of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.
• “Shift All Bus” is only valid when the cross-point button shift operation (see
previous item) is set to “Lock” or “Off.”

Setting the source signal name


1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button
Assign menu, press [Src Name/LCD Color].
The Src Name/LCD Color menu appears.

2 Turn the knob to select the signal to be set.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Source No Source signal selection 1 to 128
2 Num Number of source signals to be 1 to 128
selected

3 Press [Source Name].


A keyboard window appears.

4 Enter any name of not more than 16 characters, then press [Enter].
For details of keyboard window operation, see “Menu Operations” in
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).

80 Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)


Sequential names for multiple signals
When you specify a number at the end of a signal name, all of the signals in the
range selected by knobs 1 and 2 are automatically assigned names ending with
sequential numbers.
Example: To assign sequential names to source signal 2 through source signal
4
1. In step 2 above, set knob 1 to “2,” and set knob 2 to “3.”
2. Set the name of source signal 2 to “CAM2.”
The name “CAM3” is assigned automatically to source signal 3, and the
name “CAM4” is assigned automatically to source signal 4.

Setting the source name display color


1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign >Src Name/LCD Color
menu, turn the knobs to select the setting target.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Source signal selection 1 to 128
2 Num Number of source signals to be 1 to 128
selected

2 In the <LCD Color> group, select the color (Orange/Green/Yellow).

Copying Cross-Point Assign Tables


The contents of a cross-point assign table can be copied to another cross-point
assign table, and vice versa.

Note
The contents of a sub table cannot be copied to the main table.

1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, press [Table Copy].


The Table Copy menu appears.
The status area shows a list of copy sources and a list of copy destinations.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the number of the table to use
as the copy source and the number of the table you want to be the copy
destination.
• Press directly on the list of copy sources (left-side list) or the list of copy
destinations (right-side list) in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) 81


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Selection of copy source 1 to 15
2 Right No Selection of copy destination 1 to 14

3 Press [Copy].
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to execute the
copy.

4 To execute the copy, press [Yes], and to cancel the operation, press [No].

Selecting Cross-Point Assign Tables


You can select the cross-point assign table to be used for each of the following
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

banks or buses.
• M/E-1 bank and PGM/PST bank
• Buses assignable to AUX delegation buttons

Note
It is not possible to assign cross-point tables 5 to 14 to a bus of a switcher
operated by an MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel.

1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, using any of the following methods, select
the switcher bank or bus.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys on the list on the left to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank/Bus No Switcher bank or 1 and upwards
bus selection
2 Num Number of 1 and upwards
selected switcher
banks or buses

2 Using any of the following methods, select the table.


• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys on the list on the right to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.

82 Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Values
3 Table No Selection of table 1 to 15
to be assigned

3 Press [Table Assign Set].


This sets the table for the selected switcher bank or bus.

Exporting Source Names and Destination Names


To send the source names and destination names to the S-Bus, use the
following procedure.

1 In the Panel >XPT Assign menu, press [Name Export].

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


The Name Export menu appears.

2 Turn the knob to set the station ID.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Station ID Station ID setting 1 to 255 a)

a) If set to 255, the information is sent to all stations (with display of “All”).

3 Press [Src Name Export].


This exports the source names to the station selected in step 2.

4 Press [Dest Name Export].


This exports the destination names to the station selected in step 2.

Note
Since destination names cannot be selected freely, fixed names are used.

Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) 83


Making Settings for Audio Mixer

Enabling the function to link the audio mixer

Note
For audio mixer operations in this system, it is necessary to set Mixer ESAM-
II for the DCU 9-pin serial port.
For details, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)” (page 192).

1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, using any of the following methods, select
the M/E bank or bus.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys in the list on the left, to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• Turn the knob.

2 Press [Audio Follow].


“Enable” appears in the Audio Follow column.

Setting the audio mixer cross-points


To assign an audio mixer cross-point to a switcher cross-point pair (video/key),
carry out the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, press [Mixer Xpt Assign].


The Mixer Xpt Assign menu appears.

2 In the list on the left, select the number for the setting.

3 In the list on the right, select the audio mixer cross-point (machine
number).

4 Press [Set].
The audio mixer number appears in the Mixer Xpt column.

84 Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)


Assigning a Cross-Point Button to Enable/Disable Side
Flags
By assigning the side flag function to the rightmost button in a cross-point
button row, you can use this button to enable/disable side flags for each of the
M/E and PGM/PST banks.
This setting applies to all of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
When you make this assignment, the SHIFT button (the button assigned to the
shift function) is moved one to the left.

Note
If a macro attachment is set, when you assign the button to the side flag
function, the button numbers are offset, and therefore when you press the
button this does not execute the macro. The settings, however, are maintained,
so that when you cancel the side flag assignment, the macro can be accessed

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


once more.

XPT
KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 DME1 DME2 DME3 DME4 UTIL1 UTIL2 SHIFT
HOLD

SHIFT button moves one to the left

Button for side flags enable/disable

For details of side flag operations, see “Side Flag Settings” in Chapter 10
(Volume 1).

1 In the Panel >XPT Assign menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].
The Side Flags Button Assign menu appears.

2 Press [Side Flags Btn Assign], turning it on.

Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) 85


This assigns the rightmost cross-point button to enabling/disabling the side
flag function.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

86 Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)


Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux
Assign Menu)

To carry out the settings of the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus
control block, use the Panel >Aux Assign menu.

To display the Aux Assign menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF3 ‘Aux Assign.’
The left side of the status area shows the delegation numbers, and the list of
buses set; the right side shows a list of buses that can be assigned.

The following functions are available here.


• Aux Assign: Assign the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


block to any bus.
• Shift Mode: Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation
buttons is used as a shift button, and when it is used as a shift button, the
operation mode.

Assigning a Bus to an AUX Delegation Button


1 In the Panel >Aux Assign menu, using any of the following methods,
select the delegation button and the bus to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Deleg No Selection of AUX delegation 1 to 128 a)
button
2 Bus No Selection of bus to be assigned 1 to 123 b)

a) The setting can be from 1 to 20. The valid settings, however, depend on the number of
buttons and the delegation button shift mode.
.

Shift mode Valid settings


OFF 1 to 10
ON 1 to 20

b) The buses that can be assigned are as follows.


AUX1 to AUX48, Monitor1 to Monitor8, DME1V to DME2V, and DME1K to DME2K

Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu) 87


M/E1 Utility, P/P Utility, Frame Memory Source1 and 2, Edit Preview, DSK1 to 4 Fill/
Source, M/E-1 Key 1 to 4 Fill/Source, M/E-1 EXT DME, P/P EXT DME, and CCR 1
and 2
• For a button for which you want to disable operation, press [Inhibit].

2 Press [Set] to confirm the selection.

To set the AUX delegation button shift operation


To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the row of AUX
delegation buttons, select one of the following in the <Shift Mode> group of
the Panel >Aux Assign menu.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted version of the AUX delegation
buttons is enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted version and the unshifted version of the AUX delegation buttons.
Off: Acts as an AUX delegation button. In a 16-button system it acts as button
number 16, in a 24-button system as button number 24, and in a 32-button
system as button number 32.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Using the Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router


Control
To make router control settings, display the Setup >Panel >Aux Assign >RTR
Mode Setting menu.

Note
This setting is disabled for the CCP-9000/9000A.

To display the RTR Mode Setting menu

1 In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF3 ‘Aux Assign.’
The Aux Assign menu appears.

2 Press [RTR Mode Setting].


The RTR Mode Setting menu appears. The left of the status area shows the
destination number assignment status and source table, and the right side
lists the destinations that can be assigned.

Assigning a destination to a destination selection button


In the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, use the following
procedure.

88 Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)


1 Using any of the following methods, select a destination selection button
and the destination to be assigned to the button.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Dest No Destination selection button 1 to 128
selection
2 No Destination selection in S-Bus 1 to 1024
space

• For a button whose operation you want to disable, press [Inhibit].

Note
When a destination selection button having a number in the range 65 to 128
is selected, source table selection automatically becomes invalid, and

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


therefore the Inhibit function also becomes invalid.

2 Press [Dest Set] to confirm the selection.

3 If in step 1 you selected a value in the range 1 to 64, turn the knob to select
the source table.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Source Source table selection 1 to 5
Table

4 Press [Source Table Set] to confirm the selection.

5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.

To set the shift operation of the destination selection buttons


To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the destination selection
button row, select one of the following in the <Dest Shift Mode> group of the
Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted destination selection buttons are
enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted and unshifted states of the destination selection buttons.
Off: Acts as a destination selection button, that is, button number 16 on a 16-
button system, button number 24 on a 24-button system, and button
number 32 on a 32-button system.

Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu) 89


Setting the source table
1 In the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, press [Source Table
Assign].
The Source Table Assign menu appears.

2 In the <Source Table Select> group, select the source table you want to
manipulate.

3 Press [Table Assign].


The Table Assign menu appears.
The left of the status area lists the button numbers and set sources, and the
right side lists the source that can be assigned.

4 Using any of the following methods, select a source selection button and
the source you want to assign.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• Press directly on the list in the status area.


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Source selection button selection 1 to 128
2 No Source selection in S-Bus space 1 to 1024

• For a button whose operation you want to disable, press [Inhibit].

5 Press [Source Set] to confirm the selection.

To set the shift operation of the source selection buttons


To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the source selection button
row with different destinations assigned to the 1st and 2nd rows, select the
source table in the Source Table Assign menu, then in the <Xpt Shift Mode>
group select one of the following.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted source selection buttons are
enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted and unshifted states of the source selection buttons.
Off: Acts as a cross-point button, that is, button number 16 on a 16-button
system, button number 24 on a 24-button system, and button number 32 on
a 32-button system.

90 Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)


To expand the shift function
To set the [KEY] button as a shift operation expansion button, in the Source
Table Assign menu select the source table, then in the <Expand Xpt Shift
Assign> group, press [Key Button].
In order not to expand the shift operation, press [No Assign] in the <Expand
Xpt Shift Assign> group.

Assigning levels to a level selection button


To assign levels to the [LEVEL1] to [LEVEL4] buttons in the auxiliary bus
control block, use the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, press [Level Button
Assign].
The Level Button Assign menu appears. The status area shows a list of the
assignment status of levels to each button.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


2 In the <Level Button Select> group, select the button you want to set.

3 In the <Level Assign> group, press the levels you want to assign to the
button, turning them on.
You can select plural of levels. You can also make a selection that overlaps
that of another button.

Selecting a destination selection button for a snapshot


To set whether snapshots are recalled for each destination selection button
individually, use the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu as follows.

1 Use any of the following methods to select the destination selection button
to which the setting applies.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Dest No Selection of destination selection 1 to 128
button

2 Press [SS Enable], turning it on or off.


On: When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled, the recall also
applies to the selected destination selection button.
Off: When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled, the recall does not
apply to the selected destination selection button.

Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu) 91


Note
When a destination selection button is set to Inhibit, then even if SS Enable
is on, the snapshot for that destination is not recalled.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

92 Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)


Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility
Menu)

Assign the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons in the menu control block, and
the utility/shotbox control block buttons.
This assigns recalling frequently used menus (menu shortcuts), enabling/
disabling functions (recalling utility commands) and recalling shotbox
registers or macro registers.
• User Preference: Make the settings for the user preference buttons in the
menu control block.
• Utility Module Assign: Make the utility/shotbox control block settings.

To display the Prefs/Utility menu

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF4 ‘Prefs/Utility.’
The status area shows the settings of the user preference buttons.

Assigning Functions to User Preference Buttons


1 In the Panel >Prefs/Utility menu, using any of the following methods,
select the button to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No User preference button selection 1 to 16

2 In the <Action> group, select the function to be assigned.


Menu Shortcut: Assign a frequently used menu to be recalled (menu
shortcut).
Utility Command: Assign a function enable/disable or similar operation
(utility command).
Macro Recall: Assign a macro register recall.
Shotbox Recall: Assign a shotbox register recall.

3 Depending on the selection in step 2, make the following settings.

Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) 93


When Menu Shortcut is selected: For the subsequent operations, see the
next item “Assigning a menu shortcut to a user preference button”
(page 97).
When Utility Command is selected: A list of commands appears on the
right of the status area; using any of the following methods, select the
command you want to assign.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Command Utility command selection 1 and upwards

4 a) GPI No GPI port number 1 and upwards

a) When the Command parameter is set to Sw’er GPI Test Fire, Panel GPI Test Fire, DCU
GPI, or Test Fire

When Macro Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the macro
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

register you want to assign.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Macro Macro register selection 1 to 99

When Shotbox Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the shotbox
register you want to assign.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Shotbox Shotbox register selection 1 to 99

4 Press [Action Set].


This assigns the selected action, which is reflected in the status area.

To cancel an assignment
After selecting the relevant button, press [Clear].

Using the [PREFS 9] to [PREFS 16] settings


There are sixteen user preference buttons that can be set, [PREFS 1] to [PREFS
16], but there are only eight user preference buttons present in the menu control
block. By default these buttons are assigned to the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 8]
settings. Therefore, to use the settings of [PREFS 9] to [PREFS 16], it is
necessary to access the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >Link/Program
Button >Menu Panel menu, and assign these settings to buttons in the menu
control block.

94 Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)


List of utility commands and user preference button status
The following table shows the utility commands that can be assigned to user
preference buttons.

Command name a) Function Button status


Lit amber Off
SWR Remote1 Enbl Switcher Remote 1 enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
| |
SWR Remote2 Enbl Switcher Remote 2 enabled/disabled
DME1 Editor Port Enbl DME1 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
DME2 Editor Port Enbl DME2 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
ME1 PGM1 ST M/E-1 PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
ME1 PGM4 ST M/E-1 PGM4 output safe title on/off
ME1 PVW ST M/E-1 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 Clean ST M/E-1 clean output safe title on/off On Off

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


ME1 K-PVW ST M/E-1 key preview output safe title on/ On Off
off
ME2 PGM1 ST M/E-2 PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
ME2 PGM4 ST M/E-2 PGM4 output safe title on/off
ME2 PVW ST M/E-2 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 Clean ST M/E-2 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 K-PVW ST M/E-2 key preview output safe title on/ On Off
off
ME3 PGM1 ST M/E-3 PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
ME3 PGM4 ST M/E-3 PGM4 output safe title on/off
ME3 PVW ST M/E-3 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME3 Clean ST M/E-3 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME3 K-PVW ST ME-3 key preview output safe title on/ On Off
off
PP PGM1 ST P/P PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
PP PGM4 ST P/P PGM4 output safe title on/off
PP PVW ST P/P preview output safe title on/off On Off
PP Clean ST P/P clean output safe title on/off On Off
PP K-PVW ST P/P key preview output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON1 ST DME Monitor 1 output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON2 ST DME Monitor 2 output safe title on/off On Off
Edit PVW ST Edit preview output safe title on/off On Off
Preset ST Preset output safe title on/off On Off

Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) 95


Command name a) Function Button status
Lit amber Off
AUX1 ST AUX1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
AUX48 ST AUX48 output safe title on/off

FM Src1 Frame Frame freeze of frame memory source During frame Either of the other
Freeze 1 freeze two states
FM Src1 Filed Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 1 During field Either of the other
freeze two states
FM Src1 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory While freeze Either of the other
source 1 being released two states
FM Src2 Frame Frame freeze of frame memory source During frame Either of the other
Freeze 2 freeze two states
FM Src2 Field Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 2 During field Either of the other
freeze two states
FM Src2 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory While freeze Either of the other
source 2 being released two states
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

SWR GPI Enbl Enable/disable switcher GPI Enabled Disabled


DME1 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME1 GPI Enabled Disabled
DME2 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME2 GPI Enabled Disabled
Panel GPI Enbl Enable/disable panel GPI Enabled Disabled
SWR GPI1 Test Fire Output test trigger from switcher GPI1 Output (lights When the output
| | only at the instant is assigned
SWR GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from switcher GPI8 the button is
pressed)
Panel GPI1 Test Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI1 Output (lights When the output
| | only at the instant is assigned
Panel GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI8 the button is
pressed)
DCU GPI1 Test Fire Output test trigger from port assigned Output (lights When the output
| to DCU GPI1 only at the instant is assigned
DCU GPI50 Test Fire | the button is
Output test trigger from port assigned pressed)
to DCU GPI50
Macro Attachment Enable/disable macro attachment Enabled Disabled
Enbl
Macro Only Set Macro only mode on/off On Off
Pre Macro Set macro attachment in pre macro Can be set only When the function
mode while pressed (lit) is assigned
Post Macro Set macro attachment in post macro Can be set only When the function
mode while pressed (lit) is assigned
Macro Take Macro execution During execution When the function
is assigned
Macro Auto Ins Macro auto insert mode on/off On Off

96 Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)


Command name a) Function Button status
Lit amber Off
Macro AT with Rate When registering an auto transition On Off
macro event, on/off setting of mode to
save transition rate
Macro AT with A/B Bus When registering an auto transition On Off
macro event for the transition control
block, on/off setting of mode to save A/
B Bus cross-point settings
Macro TL with Region When registering a timeline macro On Off
event, on/off setting of mode to save
applicable region
DME Override DME override on/off On Off
DME Graphic DME graphics on/off (Applies to On Off
graphics for channel selected in device
control block)
System Manager Enbl Enable/disable operation from System Enabled Disabled

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Manager
Plug-In Editor Enbl Enable/disable operation from an Enabled Disabled
editing keyboard
Inhibit Set Inhibit cross-point button Can be set only When the function
while pressed (lit) is assigned
Inhibit All Clear Clear all cross-point button inhibit Can be set only When the function
settings while pressed (lit) is assigned

a) For the safe title on/off commands (from ME1 PGM1 ST-ME1 PGM4 ST to AUX1 ST-AUX48
ST), the name of the assigned output signal is shown.

Assigning a menu shortcut to a user preference button


1 Referring to the procedure up to step 2 on page 93, select [Menu Shortcut].
The user preference buttons [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] flash amber.

2 Using any of the following methods, display the menu to which you want
to make a shortcut.
• In the menu control block, press the relevant top menu selection button,
then select VF and HF.
• Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu
screen, then enter a menu number from the numeric keypad window.
• Press a particular control panel button twice in rapid succession.

3 Press the user preference button to which you want to assign the shortcut.
The menu screen goes back to the Prefs/Utility menu, and the selection is
reflected in the status area. The user preference buttons [PREFS 1] to
[PREFS 16] flash amber.

Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) 97


4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to assign all desired menu shortcuts to
the user preference buttons.

To abandon the process of menu shortcut assignment


In the Prefs/Utility menu, press [Menu Shortcut] once more.
This exits the menu shortcut assignment mode.

Assigning a Function to a Memory Recall Button in the


Utility/Shotbox Control Block (MKS-8033 Utility/
Shotbox Module, Option)
1 In the Prefs/Utility menu, press [Utility Module Assign].
The Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign menu appears. The status area
shows the settings in the utility/shotbox control block.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

2 Using any of the following methods, select the button to be assigned.


• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Bank selection 1 to 4
2 Button No Control block button selection 1 to 24

3 In the <Action> group, select the function you want to assign.


Menu Shortcut: Assign a frequently used menu to be recalled (menu
shortcut).
Utility Command: Assign a function enable/disable or similar operation
(utility command).
Macro Recall: Assign a macro register recall.
Shotbox Recall: Assign a shotbox register recall.

4 Depending on the selection in step 3, make the following settings.


When Menu Shortcut is selected: For the subsequent operations, see the
next item “Assigning a menu shortcut to a memory recall button”
(page 102).
When Utility Command is selected: A list of commands appears on the
right of the status area; using any of the following methods, select the
command you want to assign.
• Press directly on the list.

98 Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Command Utility command selection 1 and upwards

4 a) GPI No GPI port number 1 and upwards

a) When the Command parameter is set to Sw’er GPI Test Fire, Panel GPI Test Fire, DCU
GPI, or Test Fire

When Macro Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the macro
register you want to assign.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Macro Macro register selection 1 to 99

When Shotbox Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the shotbox
register you want to assign.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Shotbox Shotbox register selection 1 to 99

5 Press [Action Set].


This assigns the selected action, which is reflected in the status area.
In the utility/shotbox control block, the assigned button lights orange.
If a shotbox register was assigned, the register name appears.

To cancel an assignment
After selecting the relevant button, press [Clear].

List of utility commands and memory recall button status


The following table shows the utility commands that can be assigned to
memory recall buttons.

Command name a) Function Button status


Lit green Lit orange
SWR Remote1 Enbl Switcher Remote 1 enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
| |
SWR Remote2 Enbl Switcher Remote 2 enabled/disabled
DME1 Editor Port Enbl DME1 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
DME2 Editor Port Enbl DME2 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
ME1 PGM1 ST M/E-1 PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
ME1 PGM4 ST M/E-1 PGM4 output safe title on/off

Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) 99


Command name a) Function Button status
Lit green Lit orange
ME1 PVW ST M/E-1 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 Clean ST M/E-1 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 K-PVW ST M/E-1 key preview output safe title on/ On Off
off
ME2 PGM1 ST M/E-2 PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
ME2 PGM4 ST M/E-2 PGM4 output safe title on/off
ME2 PVW ST M/E-2 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 Clean ST M/E-2 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 K-PVW ST M/E-2 key preview output safe title on/ On Off
off
ME3 PGM1 ST M/E-3 PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
ME3 PGM4 ST M/E-3 PGM4 output safe title on/off
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

ME3 PVW ST M/E-3 preview output safe title on/off On Off


ME3 Clean ST M/E-3 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME3 K-PVW ST ME-3 key preview output safe title on/ On Off
off
PP PGM1 ST PP PGM1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
PP PGM4 ST PP PGM4 output safe title on/off
PP PVW ST P/P preview output safe title on/off On Off
PP Clean ST P/P clean output safe title on/off On Off
PP K-PVW ST P/P key preview output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON1 ST DME Monitor 1 output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON2 ST DME Monitor 2 output safe title on/off On Off
Edit PVW ST Edit preview output safe title on/off On Off
Preset ST Preset output safe title on/off On Off
AUX1 ST AUX1 output safe title on/off On Off
| |
AUX48 ST AUX48 output safe title on/off

FM Src1 Frame Frame freeze of frame memory source During frame Either of the other
Freeze 1 freeze two states
FM Src1 Filed Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 1 During field Either of the other
freeze two states
FM Src1 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory While freeze Either of the other
source 1 being released two states
FM Src2 Frame Frame freeze of frame memory source During frame Either of the other
Freeze 2 freeze two states
FM Src2 Field Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 2 During field Either of the other
freeze two states

100 Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)


Command name a) Function Button status
Lit green Lit orange
FM Src2 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory While freeze Either of the other
source 2 being released two states
SWR GPI Enbl Enable/disable switcher GPI Enabled Disabled
DME1 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME1 GPI Enabled Disabled
DME2 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME2 GPI Enabled Disabled
Panel GPI Enbl Enable/disable panel GPI Enabled Disabled
SWR GPI1 Test Fire Output test trigger from switcher GPI1 Output (lights When the output
| | only at the instant is assigned
SWR GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from switcher GPI8 the button is
pressed)
Panel GPI1 Test Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI1 Output (lights When the output
| | only at the instant is assigned
Panel GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI8 the button is
pressed)

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


DCU GPI1 Test Fire Output test trigger from port assigned Output (lights When the output
| to DCU GPI1 only at the instant is assigned
DCU GPI50 Test Fire | the button is
Output test trigger from port assigned pressed)
to DCU GPI50
Macro Attachment Enable/disable macro attachment Enabled Disabled
Enbl
Macro Only Set Macro only mode on/off On Off
Pre Macro Set macro attachment in pre macro Can be set only When the function
mode while pressed (lit) is assigned
Post Macro Set macro attachment in post macro Can be set only When the function
mode while pressed (lit) is assigned
Macro Take Macro execution During execution When the function
is assigned
Macro Auto Ins Macro auto insert mode on/off On Off
Macro AT with Rate When registering an auto transition On Off
macro event, on/off setting of mode to
save transition rate
Macro AT with A/B Bus When registering an auto transition On Off
macro event for the transition control
block, on/off setting of mode to save A/
B Bus cross-point settings
Macro TL with Region When registering a timeline macro On Off
event, on/off setting of mode to save
applicable region
DME Override DME override on/off On Off
DME Graphic DME graphics on/off (Applies to On Off
graphics for channel selected in device
control block)

Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) 101


Command name a) Function Button status
Lit green Lit orange
Plug-In Editor Enbl Enable/disable operation from an Enabled Disabled
editing keyboard
Inhibit Set Inhibit cross-point button Can be set only When the function
while pressed (lit) is assigned
Inhibit All Clear Clear all cross-point button inhibit Can be set only When the function
settings while pressed (lit) is assigned

a) For the safe title on/off commands (from ME1 PGM1 ST-ME1 PGM4 ST to AUX1 ST-AUX48
ST), the name of the assigned output signal is shown.

Assigning a menu shortcut to a memory recall button


1 Referring to the procedure up to step 3 on “Assigning a Function to a
Memory Recall Button in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block (MKS-8033
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Utility/Shotbox Module, Option)” (page 98), select [Menu Shortcut].


The memory recall buttons in the utility/shotbox control block flash
orange.

2 Using any of the following methods, display the menu to which you want
to make a shortcut.
• In the menu control block, press the relevant top menu selection button,
then select VF and HF.
• Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu
screen, then enter a menu number from the numeric keypad window.
• Press a particular control panel button twice in rapid succession.

3 In the utility/shotbox control block, select the bank, and press the button to
which you want to assign the shortcut.
The menu screen goes back to the Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign
menu, and the selection is reflected in the status area.
The buttons in the utility/shotbox control block flash.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to assign all desired menu shortcuts to


the buttons in the utility/shotbox control block.

To abandon the process of menu shortcut assignment


In the Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign menu, press [Menu Shortcut].
This exits the menu shortcut assignment mode.

102 Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)


Setting names to be displayed in memory recall buttons

Note
The name you set using the following procedure is displayed only when “Menu
Shortcut” or “Utility Command” has been assigned to the selected memory
recall button. To set a name for display in a memory recall button to which
“Shotbox Recall” or “Macro Recall” has been assigned, use the Shotbox menu
or Macro menu.

1 In the Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign menu, select the button using
any of the following methods.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


1 Bank Bank selection 1 to 4
2 Button No Control block button selection 1 to 24

2 Press [Name].
A keyboard window appears.

3 Enter a name of not more than eight characters, and press [Enter].
The name you have set is reflected in the status area and on the memory
recall button in the utility/shotbox control block.

Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) 103


Interfacing With External Devices (Device
Interface Menu)

To carry out setup relating to connections with external devices, display the
Panel >Device Interface menu.

To display the Device Interface menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF5 ‘Device
Interface.’

The following functions are available here.


• GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger type, and make the action
settings.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger type, and make the action
settings.
• P-Bus Control: Set the control mode for P-Bus devices.
• DCU Serial Port Assign: Assign the devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended
VTR) connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the
[DEV1] to [DEV12] buttons which become operative when you press the
[DEV] button on the device control block. For a disk recorder or Extended
VTR, you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists. Further, you
can make settings for devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR) operable
from an editing keyboard.
• Editor Port Assign: When the BZS-8050 license is valid, make settings for
the SCU editor panel port.

Making Control Panel GPI Input Settings


1 In the Panel >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Input].
The GPI Input menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8

104 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


3 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger type.
(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.

(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input


pulse.

(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the


input signal.

(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.

4 In the <Target> group, select the action block.


M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, P/P: Set the action for one of the banks.
Common/Setup: Set an action for something other than the above, or a

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


setup action.

5 Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards b)
4 Aux Bus No Aux bus selection 1 to 48 c)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 c)
1 to 99 d)
1 to 399 e)
5 Src No Source signal selection 1 and upwards b)
5 No User preference button 1 to 16 f)
selection

a) As for the setting values, see “Selectable actions for various trigger types” (page 106).
b) When knob 2 selection is “Aux ? O’ride Src ??”
c) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
d) When knob 2 selection is “Snapshot” or “Shotbox”
e) When knob 2 selection is “Effect”
f) When knob 2 selection is “Prefs Button?”

6 Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.


The selected setting appears in the status area.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 105


Selectable actions for various trigger types
• When the trigger type is other than “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Cut, Auto Trans
Key1 Cut, Key2 Cut, Key3 Cut, Key4 Cut
Key1 Auto Trans, Key2 Auto Trans, Key3 Auto Trans, Key4 Auto
Trans
Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3 SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ?
Recall
When Target is P/P: Cut, Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut, DSK2 Cut, DSK3 Cut, DSK4 Cut
DSK1 Auto Trans, DSK2 Auto Trans, DSK3 Auto Trans, DSK4 Auto
Trans
DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4 SS ?
Recall
FTB Cut, FTB Auto Trans
When Target is Common/Setup: Master SS ? Recall, Master Effect ?
Recall, SS ? Recall, Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF
Stop, KF Rewind, FM Src1 Frame Freeze, FM Src1 Field Freeze, FM
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Src1 Freeze Off, FM Src2 Frame Freeze, FM Src2 Field Freeze, FM


Src2 Freeze Off, FM Src1 Clip Record, FM Src1 Clip Stop, FM Src2
Clip Record, FM Src2 Clip Stop, FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup, FM1 to FM8
Clip Play, FM1 to FM8 Clip Stop, Shotbox ? Recall, Macro Take, Prefs
Buttons?, Macro ? Recall, No Action
• When the trigger type is only “Rising Edge” or “Falling Edge”
Aux? O’ride Src??
• When the trigger type is “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, or P/P: No Action
When Target is Common/Setup: Format (Overall system settings, frame/
field rate, number of lines)
Aspect (overall system settings), Simul, Level Enable, No Action

Notes
• “Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the “Aspect” and “Format” actions
that can be used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used,
if the input is “Disable” then it is not possible to switch “Aspect” or “Format”
by GPI input.
If a GPI to switch “Aspect” or “Format” occurs when powering the system
off, the action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power
goes off and the power may go off before the action is completed. This may
corrupt the setup settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable
to avoid such a situation.
• As for “Aux ? O’ride Src ??,” when “Rising Edge” is selected, on a rising
edge the set AUX bus primary input is used. On a falling edge, the original
state of the cross-point is restored. If the GPI trigger is applied repeatedly at
short intervals (0.5 second or less), the cross-point switching may not be
carried out correctly. In this case, apply the GPI trigger again.

106 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


• If “System Format” is selected for “Action” when the format converter is
used, you can set the conversion formats of the format converter for “FC
Input 1-8”.

Carrying out level settings


To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Device Interface menu, select the action to be set, and press
[H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Signal format/screen 1 and upwards
aspect ratio selection

3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level,
press [H Set]. To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low,
press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.

Making Control Panel GPI Output Settings


1 In the Panel >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Output].
The GPI Output menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8

3 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 107


(Rising Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open-
circuit or drives the output high, and holds this state for the
specified pulse width.
(Falling Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted
or drives the output low, and holds this state for the specified
pulse width.
(Any Edge): Each time the trigger occurs, the relay contacts are
alternately closed or opened, or the output is switched between
high and low.
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level.

4 Turning the knobs, select the pulse width and timing to be set.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 (fields)


4 Timing Output timing 1 to 3 a)

a) 1: Field 1, 2: Field 2, 3: Any

When “ ” is selected as the trigger polarity, there is no Pulse Width


setting. When “Status” is selected, there is no Pulse Width or Timing
setting.

5 In the <Source> group, select the action block.


M/E-1 to M/E-3 and P/P: Set an action for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Common: Set an action for error status.

6 Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)

a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Status”


When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3
SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall, No Action
When Source is P/P: DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK
4 SS ? Recall, No Action
When Source is Common: KF Run, No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Status”

108 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3
SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall
Key1 On, Key2 On, Key3 On, Key4 On, No Action
When Source is P/P: DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4
SS ? Recall
DSK1 On, DSK2 On, DSK3 On, DSK4 On, No Action
When Source is Common: Error Make, Error Break, PREFS1, PREFS2, PREFS3,
PREFS4, PREFS5, PREFS6, PREFS7, PREFS8, PREFS9, PREFS10, PREFS11,
PREFS12, PREFS13, PREFS14, PREFS15, PREFS16, Device Recording, No
Action
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”

7 Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.


The selected setting appears in the status area.

Test firing the trigger


To test fire the trigger, press [Test Fire].
This outputs a trigger from the selected output port. This is not output when the

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


trigger type is “Status.”

Setting the Control Mode for P-Bus Devices


In the <P-Bus Control> group of the Panel >Device Interface menu, select the
mode.
Trigger: When a predetermined button is pressed, the action command
assigned to that button is output, to control an external device.
Timeline: The external device is controlled as a keyframe effect controlled by
the center control panel.

Setting the SCU Editor Panel Port


When an editing keyboard is used, this port setting is for the editing keyboard
if the license for the BZS-8050 is valid (see page 32), and for the serial tally if
the license for the BZS-8050 is invalid.
If you want to use the port setting for the serial tally when the license for the
BZS-8050 is valid, select [Serial Tally] from the <Editor Port Assign> group
in the Panel >Device Interface menu.
Serial Tally: Use the SCU editor panel port for the serial tally.
Editor Keyboard: Use the SCU editor panel port for the editing keyboard.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 109


Making DCU Serial Port Settings
You can assign buttons in the device control block (DEV1 to DEV12) to DCU
serial ports, to operate the devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR)
connected to these ports. For a disk recorder/Extended VTR, you can also set
the sharing of file lists.
For details of DCU serial port settings, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port
Assign Menu)” (page 192).

Associating a serial port with a device selection button


1 In the Panel >Device Interface menu, press [DCU Serial Port Assign].
The Serial Port Assign menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the DCU serial port.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• Press directly on the list in the status area.


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Serial port selection 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings.

The DCU number, slot number, and serial port number appear.

3 Select the device selection button to be assigned from the <Assign> group.

Notes
• It is not possible to assign more than one device selection button to the
same port. The later assigned device selection button takes priority, and
the previous selection is invalidated.
• If P-Bus/Mixer ESAM-II is assigned to a serial port, it is not possible to
assign a device selection button to that port.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make assignments to other ports.

To select whether to use an editing keyboard


If you want to use an editing keyboard for the selected device, select a port
using the same operation as in step 2, then press [Plug-In Editor Enbl] to
display “Enbl” in the Editor column. If you do not want to use an editing
keyboard, press [Plug-In Editor Enbl] to make the “Enbl” display disappear.

110 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


Notes
• This selection is possible when the BZS-8050 license is valid (see page 32).
• A port to which Mixer ESAM-II is assigned is automatically set to Enbl, and
you cannot change this setting.

Sharing Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Lists


To share files between devices connected to the same disk recorder/Extended
VTR, use the following procedure.

Note
The following operation can only be carried out for the ports to which a disk
recorder or Extended VTR is assigned.

1 In the Panel >Device Interface >Serial Port Assign menu, select the target

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


disk recorder/Extended VTR.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Serial port selection 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings.

2 Turn the knob to select the device selection button (DEV1 to DEV12) for
sharing the file list.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 File List Device selection button for 1 to 12
sharing the file list

3 Press [Same File List Set].


This is reflected in the file list in the status area.

4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 as required to select other devices for sharing the file
list.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 111


Operation Settings (Operation Menu)

To make settings relating to panel operation, use the Panel >Operation menu.

To display the Operation menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF6 ‘Operation.’
The status area shows the items that can be set and a list of the settings.

The following functions are available here.


• Button Tally: Set whether or not the system tally generation results are
reflected in the panel tally.
• Trans Rate Display: Select whether the transition rate display mode is in
frames or timecode units.
• S-Bus Name Link: Copy the S-Bus description name to the source name.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• Effect: For keyframe effects, you can make the following settings. (See
Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2).)
– Recall mode
– Automatically turning off the [EDIT ENBL] button when an effect is
recalled
– Automatic insertion of a first keyframe when an empty register is recalled
– Effect Auto Save
– Default KF Duration
– Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI/
P-Bus/disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR/Macro effect
• Source/Dest Name: For the Source/Dest (source/destination) names used by
the system, select one of the following:
– Source name set by cross-point assignment or fixed bus name
– Description name set on routing switcher
– “Type + Num” name set on routing switcher
Names assigned with Xpt Assign can be replaced later with description
names.
• Name Display: Specify the number of characters for display of the names
selected in Source/Dest Name above, as two characters, four characters, or
Auto.
• Flexi Pad Mode: Make menu settings for wipe snapshots.
• Custom Button: Set the following button operation modes.
– [ALL] button for next transition selection
– [AUTO TRANS] or [TAKE] button during auto transition execution
– [RUN] button during keyframe execution
– [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] button replacement
– [TRANS PVW] button
– Key delegation [DME1] and [DME2] button selection mode
– Key delegation [XPT HOLD] button operation mode

112 Operation Settings (Operation Menu)


– Selection of signal assigned to the auxiliary bus control block key source
bus (either key signal only, or either video signal or key signal selectable)
• Sensitivity: Adjust trackball, joystick and double-click sensitivity, or set the
relationship between the angle of the search dial and the playback speed.
• Macro: Set the macro execution mode.

Setting the On-Air Tally


To set the high tally state reflected on the control panel, use the following
procedure.

1 In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Button Tally].


The Button Tally menu appears.

2 In the <Tally Type> group, select either of the following.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


[R1] to [R8]: Reflect any of tally groups 1 to 8 as the tally state.
Independent: Reflect only the switcher tally state.

3 Press [Execute].
A popup window appears and shows the progress of the operation.

Setting the Transition Rate Display Mode


To determine whether to display transition rate values in menus and on the
control panel in frames or as timecode values, select either of the following in
the <Trans Rate Display> group.
Frame: display in frames.
Timecode: display as timecode (SS:FF).

Making Settings Relating to Effects


To make settings relating to the functions used when carrying out keyframe
effect operations, use the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Effect Mode].


The Effect Mode menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.

Operation Settings (Operation Menu) 113


2 Make the following settings as required.
Effect recall mode: To select the state of the first keyframe when an effect
is recalled, select [Recall] (the first keyframe is not recalled) or
[Recall&Rewind] (the first keyframe is recalled) in the <Recall
Mode> group.
Automatically turning [EDIT ENBL] off: When an effect is recalled
with the [EDIT ENBL] button on, to automatically turn this button off,
disabling keyframe editing, turn [Edit Enable Auto Off] on.
Automatic first keyframe insertion: When an empty register is recalled,
to automatically insert a first keyframe of the state at that point, turn
[1st KF Auto Insert] on.
Automatic effect saving: To automatically save an effected when it is
recalled after being edited, turn [Effect Auto Save] on.
Keyframe duration default value: Press [Default KF Duration], then
enter the default value from the numeric keypad window.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed


For P-Bus, GPI, and DDR/VTR timeline operations, to execute the first
keyframe when a rewind is carried out, set each external device on in the
<REWIND&1st KF> group in the Effect Mode menu.

Note
When an effect is executed by pressing the [RUN] button with this setting on,
the first keyframe action is not executed.

GPI: setting for the GPI timeline


P-Bus: setting for the P-Bus timeline
DDR/VTR: setting for the VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline
Macro: setting for the macro timeline

Setting the Source and Destination Names


To set the Source and Destination names used in the control panel, use the
following procedure.

Note
Before carrying out these settings, it is necessary to set the number of the S-Bus
description name.

114 Operation Settings (Operation Menu)


For details of the operation, see “Setting the group number of an S-Bus
description name” (page 206).

1 In the <Source/Dest Name> group of the Panel >Operation menu, select


the names to be used from the following.
Sw’er Local: Source names set in the Xpt Assign menu, and fixed bus
names
S-Bus Descript: Description names set in the router
S-Bus Type + Num: Type + Num set in the router (In this case always
eight characters.)

2 In the <Name Display Mode> group, select the method of display in the
source name displays.
Auto: Optimize display according to number of characters. A name of up
to two characters appears as two characters in one line. A name of up
to four characters appears as four characters in one line.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Otherwise, up to the first eight characters are shown in two lines.
2 Character: The first two characters appear.
4 Character: The first four characters appear.

To replace a name set in the Xpt Assign menu with an S-Bus


description name
Turn [S-Bus Name Link] on. This has such effect that each time a description
name is changed on the router, the corresponding source name is automatically
changed. Thus, the same description name can always be used both on the
router and the switcher.
Even when [Sw’er Local] is selected, the same name as when [S-Bus Descript]
is selected can be displayed. The S-Bus description name can also be displayed
in the Xpt Assign menu.

Settings for the Wipe Snapshot Menu


You can select the pattern numbers or register names as the button indications
for the following menus.
• M/E-1 >Wipe >Wipe Snapshot menu
• M/E-1 >DME Wipe >DME Wipe Snapshot menu
• Misc >Snapshot menu

1 In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Flexi Pad Mode].


The Flexi Pad Mode menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.

Operation Settings (Operation Menu) 115


2 Make the following settings as required.
When making settings for the Wipe Snapshot menu or DME Wipe
Snapshot menu memory recall buttons: In the <Wipe/DME
Display> group, press to select [Pattern] or [Register Name].
When making settings for the Misc >Snapshot menu memory recall
buttons: In the <Snapshot/Effect Display> group, press to select
[Register No] or [Register Name].

Setting the Button Operation Mode


1 In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Custom Button].
The Custom Button menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

2 Make the following settings as required.


Operation mode of the [ALL] button in the transition control block:
To specify the next transition to be selected by pressing the [ALL]
button in the transition control block, press the next transition you
want to select, turning it on, in the <Next Trans All> group. If
everything here is set to Off, then pressing the [ALL] button does not
change the specification of the next transition.
Operation mode during an auto transition: For the operation mode
when the [AUTO TRANS] or [TAKE] button is pressed once more
during an auto transition, select [Continue] or [Cancel] in the <Auto
Trans/Take> group.
Continue: Continue the auto transition.
Cancel: Cancel the auto transition and return to the state before
starting the auto transition.
Operation mode during keyframe execution: For the operation mode
when the [RUN] button is pressed once more during effect execution,
select [Continue] or [Cancel] in the <Run> group.
Continue: Continue the execution.
Cancel: Cancel the execution and return to the state before starting the
execution.
Interchanging the [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] buttons: To
interchange the [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] buttons in the transition
control block, press the [Auto Trans/Cut Swap] button, turning it on.
Transition preview operation mode: For the operation mode of the
[TRANS PVW] button, select [Lock] or [Hold] in the <Trans Pvw>
group. The setting as to whether to use the “One-time mode” in which
the transition preview terminates when the transition completes, or to
use button control, is made on the switcher side (see page 145).

116 Operation Settings (Operation Menu)


[KEY] button operation mode for key source bus operations: For key
source bus operations, specify the operation mode of the [KEY] button
in the auxiliary bus control block in the <Key Source Bus Select
Mode> group, as follows.
Key: If you select this, the [KEY] button is always unlit, and this mode
allows only key signals to be selected with the cross-point buttons.
Video & Key: The [KEY] button is enabled, and either video or key
signals can be selected.
CCP-9000/9000A-specific button settings: Press [CCP-9000 Button],
and skip to step 3.

3 If required, make the following settings.


DME channel selection mode: To set the mode when one of the [DME1]
and [DME2] buttons in the key delegation section is pressed to select
the DME channel, select either of the following in the <DME Select>
group.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Override: Forcibly select the selected channel. (Later selection takes
precedence).
Pre Select: It is not possible to select a channel that has already been
otherwise selected. (Earlier selection takes precedence.)
Operation mode of the [XPT HOLD] button in the key delegation
section: To set the operation mode of the [XPT HOLD] button in the
key delegation section, select either of the following in the <Xpt
Hold> group.
A/B Bus: When the [XPT HOLD] button is pressed, turning it on,
cross-point hold is enabled for the A and B buses only.
All Bus: When the [XPT HOLD] button is pressed, turning it on,
cross-point hold is enabled for all buses used on the bank being
currently operated.
(A/B buses, Key 1 to Key 4 buses, Utility bus, external DME bus)

Setting Trackball, Joystick, Search Dial, and Double-


Click Sensitivity
You can set the operational sensitivity for trackball, joystick and the buttons
which recall the relevant menus when pressed twice, and the relation of the
rotation angle of search dial with the playback speed.

1 In the Panel >Operation menu, press the [Sensitivity].


The Sensitivity menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.

Operation Settings (Operation Menu) 117


2 Make the following settings as required.
Trackball and Z-ring sensitivity in normal mode: In the <Trackball
Normal Mode> group, select [×1], [×2], or [×4].
Trackball and Z-ring sensitivity in fine mode: In the <Trackball Fine
Mode> group, select [1/2], [1/4], or [1/8].
Joystick sensitivity in normal mode: In the <Joystick Normal Mode>
group, select [×1], [×2], or [×4].
Joystick sensitivity in fine mode: In the <Joystick Fine Mode> group,
select [1/2], [1/4], or [1/8].
Touch sensitivity for recalling menus by double-clicking buttons: In
the <Double Click> group, select [Fast], [Normal], or [Slow].
Search dial rotation angle to attain the same playback speed: In the
<SHTL/VAR Dial Range> group, select [Narrow] or [Wide].

Specifying Main Split Fader


Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

In the <Main Split Fader> group of the Panel >Operation menu, select [Left]
or [Right].

Note
This setting is disabled for the CCP-9000/9000A.

Setting the Macro Execution Mode


1 Press [Macro] in the Panel >Operation menu.
The Macro menu appears.

2 In the <Macro Execution Mode> group, select the macro execution mode.
Normal: normal execution mode
Step: step execution mode

3 In the <Flexi Pad Edit Mode> group, set the macro editing mode of the
standard type Flexi Pad to [Pause Only] or [Full Editing].
This enables the standard type Flexi Pad control block to be used for macro
editing. Depending on the macro editing mode setting, functions are
assigned to the memory recall buttons as shown in the following figure.

118 Operation Settings (Operation Menu)


When the setting is When the setting is
[Pause Only] [Full Editing]

AUTO
EXIT STOR ??
INS

PAUS ALL

INS MOD DEL

PAUS STOR ?? <PREV >NEXT

Note
This setting is disabled for the CCP-9000/9000A.

4 When making a macro attachment setting, select whether or not to enable

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


cross-point button operations in the <Attachment Setting Mode> group.
With Button Function: enable cross-point button operations
W/o Button Function: disable cross-point button operations

Operation Settings (Operation Menu) 119


Screen Saver and Other Settings
(Maintenance Menu)

To make settings relating to the screen saver, etc., use the Panel >Maintenance
menu.
• Screen Saver: Make the menu screen saver settings.
• LCD Brightness: Adjust the LCD brightness.
• LED Brightness: Adjust the LED brightness.
• Switch Brightness: Adjust the switch brightness.
• Touch Beep: Select whether or not to sound a beep when a menu operation
is carried out.
• Touch Panel Calibration: Calibrate the touch panel.
• Initial Menu Set: Specify the menu to be displayed at menu startup.
• Mouse Slider Control: Select the mouse button used for adjusting the bar
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

positions of the knob parameters.

To display the Maintenance menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF7 ‘Maintenance.’
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.

Screen Saver Settings


To enable the menu screen saver, use the following procedure.

1 In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [Screen Saver], turning it on.

2 Adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Sleep Time Time until screen saver starts 1 to 300 (minutes)
operation

Adjusting the Brightness


You can adjust each of the following brightnesses independently.
LCD: Adjust the brightness of the source name displays and the LCD buttons
in the Flexi Pad control block.

120 Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu)


LED: Adjust the brightness of the LED displays in the numeric keypad control
block and so forth.
Switch: Adjust the brightness of the panel switches.
The following description takes the LCD brightness as an example. Use a
similar process for the other adjustments.

1 In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [LCD Brightness].

2 Adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Brightness Menu screen brightness 1 to 5 a)

a) The larger the value, the brighter the screen.

Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)


Adjusting the Alarms
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, make the following settings.
To give audible feedback from menu touch screen operations: Press
[Touch Beep], turning it on.

Calibrating the Touch Panel


1 In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [Touch Panel Calibration].
The following message appears.
“To Perform Calibration, please touch the center of each plus sign.”

2 Press [Yes].

3 Press the center of the plus sign displayed on the screen.


When you press on the plus sign, it disappears and a diagonally opposite
plus sign appears.

4 Press the center of the plus sign.


A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to restart the panel reflecting the new setting.
• Select “No” to cancel the setting and return to the Maintenance menu.

Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu) 121


Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are
Started
1 In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [Initial Menu Set].
A popup window appears.

2 Enter the page number of the desired menu.


The next time the menus are started, the menu specified by this number
appears.

Note
To enable this setting, the initial state of the control panel when powered on
must be set to one of the following.
• Set to Resume mode
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)

• Set to Custom mode, with “User” selected in the <Setup> group.


For details of these settings, see “Selecting the State After Powering On (Start
Up Menu)” (page 24).

Selecting the Mouse Button Used for Adjusting the


Knob Parameters
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press either of the following buttons in the
<Mouse Sliding Control> group.
Left Button: Dragging the bar while holding down the left mouse button
adjusts the parameter assigned to the knob.
Right Button: Dragging the bar while holding down the right mouse button
adjusts the parameter assigned to the knob.

Note
When Left Button selected, even pressing one of the knob parameter buttons in
the menu control block does not display a numeric keypad window.

122 Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu)


Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)
Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) .............................125
Adjusting the Reference Phase ..........................................................126
Specifying the Video Switching Timing ...........................................126
Setting the Operation Mode ..............................................................126
Setting User Regions .........................................................................128
Assigning PGM/PST Logically to an M/E ........................................129
Setting the Assignments of DME Channels to Use on the Individual M/E
Banks ......................................................................................129
Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operation ........................130
Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) ........................................................132
Making Phase Adjustment and Through Mode Settings ...................132
Making Video Process Settings .........................................................133
Enabling the Illegal Color Limiter ....................................................133
Setting the Format Converter Inputs .................................................134
Signal Output Settings (Output Menu) ..................................................140
Assigning Output Signals ..................................................................140
Setting the Output Signal ..................................................................141
Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu) .....................145
Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings ...........................................145
Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction
(Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu) .........................................................148
Switching Video Process Memory On or Off ...................................148
Settings for the Show Key Function ..................................................149
Settings for Key Auto Drop Function ...............................................149
Automatically Naming and Saving to Frame Memory .....................150
Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings ...........................................150
Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu) .................................153
Setting a Cross-Point Button Link .....................................................153
Making Link Table Settings ..............................................................155
Linking Cross-Point Buttons and GPI Output Ports .........................155
Making a Setting for Linking Two M/E Banks .................................157
Making a Link Setting for Key Transition ........................................158
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) ...............160
Making 9-Pin Port Device Interface Settings ....................................160
Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings ................................161
Making Switcher Processor GPI Output Settings .............................164
Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control ..........................................166
Setting the Interface Between the DME and the Switcher ................166
Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys Upon Receiving the Editor
Command ...............................................................................168
Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config
Menu)

To make settings for the switcher processor configuration, use the Switcher
>Config menu.

To display the Config menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF1 ‘Config.’
The status area shows the output signal assignment for each of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.

The following functions are available here.


• System Phase: Adjust the switcher internal reference phase.
• Switching Timing: Specify the timing of video switching.
• M/E Config: Set the configuration for the M/E and PGM/PST outputs.
– Standard mode: Fix the output configuration for the maximum of four
outputs (Out1 to 4) as follows.
Out1: Program output
Out2: Preview output
Out3: Clean output
Out4: Key preview output
The program output is: clean output + key 1 + key 2 + key 3 + key 4

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


For the key preview output, you can select either video mode (background
and key) or key mode (key only), and select the background and key (K-
PVW Config).
– Multi-program mode: Increase the number of M/E or PGM/PST
programs, and assign any of the following to the maximum of four outputs
(Out1 to 4). (M/E Output Assign)
Program outputs 1 to 4, preview output, key preview outputs 1 and 2, clean
output.
To configure the program output, you can select the background from
Clean or Utility and the key from Key 1 to 4. (PGM Config)
• User 1 to 8 Config: Assign the User regions, being color backgrounds 1,
AUX1 to 48, monitor 1 to 8, frame memory 1 to 8, and color correctors 1 and
2, to any of User1 to User8.
• Logical M/E Assign: Make settings for handling PGM/PST hardware
logically as an M/E.
• DME Config: Set the DME channel assignments used on the individual
M/E and PGM/PST banks.
• Side Flags: Make settings relating to the side flag function (inserting a
selected image on both sides of a 4:3 image).

Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) 125


Adjusting the Reference Phase
To adjust the switcher internal reference phase, in the Switcher >Config menu,
set the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Phase Switcher internal reference phase –32.00 to +96.00

Specifying the Video Switching Timing


1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [Switching Timing].
The Switching Timing menu appears.

2 Select any of the following.


Any: Not specified
Field 1: Field 1 (odd fields)
Field 2: Field 2 (even fields)

Note
When the signal format is set to 720P, this selection is not possible.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Setting the Operation Mode


In the <M/E Config> group of the Switcher >Config menu, select the operation
mode for each M/E or PGM/PST bank from the following.
• Standard mode
• Multi Program mode
For details of the modes, see the explanation of the M/E Config function (page
125).

Note
When Multi Program mode is selected, two or more transition type indication
may light. It is also possible that more than one “Transition Type” has been
selected in the Misc >Transition menu for each M/E.

Assigning the output of each bank in Multi Program mode


When you selected [Multi Program] as the operation mode, use the following
procedure.

126 Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)


1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [M/E Output Assign].
The M/E Output Assign menu appears.

2 On the list in the status area, select the bank output to be assigned.
The selected output appears in reverse video.

3 In the <M/E Output Assign> group, select the output signal to be assigned.

Setting the output configuration for each bank


When you selected [Multi Program] as the operation mode, use the following
procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [PGM Config].


The PGM Config menu appears.
The status area shows the background and key configuration assigned to
the output of each bank.

2 Using either of the following methods, select the output for which you
want to make the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No (PGM) Output to which setting applies 1 to 16

The selected output appears in reverse video.

3 In the <Bkgd> group, select the background.

4 Select [Clean] or [Utility].

5 In each of the <Key1> to <Key4> groups, select [Enable] or [Disable].

Setting the key preview configuration


You can make this setting at any time, regardless of the operation mode.

1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [K-PVW Config].


The K-PVW Config menu appears.
The status area shows the key preview configuration for each bank.

Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) 127


2 Using either of the following methods, select the key preview to which the
settings apply.
• Press directly on the list in the status area to make the selection.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No (K-PVW) Key preview to which setting 1 to 8
applies

The selected key preview appears in reverse video.

3 In the <Mode> group, select [Video] mode or [Key] mode.


If you select Key mode, skip to step 6.

4 In the <Bkgd> group, select the background.

5 Select [Clean] or [Utility].

6 In the <Key 1> to <Key 4> groups, select the corresponding key status
from the following.
Link: Follow the key on/off setting.
On: Key is always on.
Off: Key is always off.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Setting User Regions

Note
If you change the user region settings, the previously stored snapshot data and
keyframe effect data can no longer be used.

1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [User1-8 Config].


The User1-8 Config menu appears. The status area shows the region names
and assigned user region numbers.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the region you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

128 Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Region Region selection 1 and upwards

3 In the <User Region Assign> group, select the user region you want to
assign. If you do not want to assign a user region, select [No Assign].

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make the settings for other regions.

5 To confirm the setting, press [Execute]. To cancel the setting and return to
the original state, press [Clear] without pressing [Execute].
When you press [Execute], a confirmation message appears.

6 Press [Yes].
This assigns a region to a user region.

Assigning PGM/PST Logically to an M/E


1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [Logical M/E Assign].
The Logical M/E Assign menu appears. The status area shows the physical
M/E and logical M/E organization.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


2 Select the M/E you want to logically set to the PGM/PST from the
<Logical M/E to Physical P/P> group.
P/P: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical PGM/PST.
M/E-1: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical M/E-1.
M/E-2: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical M/E-2.
M/E-3: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical M/E-3.

Setting the Assignments of DME Channels to Use on


the Individual M/E Banks
The Switcher >Config >DME Config menu allows you to select the DME
channels to use on the M/E and PGM/PST banks for processed keys or DME
wipes.

1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [DME Config].


The DME Config menu appears.

Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) 129


2 Using either of the following methods, select the M/E or PGM/PST bank
for which you want to set a DME channel assignment.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

3 In the <DME Ch\annel> group, press the [Ch1] or [Ch2] button, turning it
on, to select the channel which you want to assign to the bank selected in
step 2.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign DME channels to other banks.

Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operation


Make settings relating to the video material (4:3 aspect ratio) for applying side
flags.
For details of side flag operations, see “Side Flag Settings” in Chapter 10
(Volume 1).

Setting the aspect ratio (4:3/16:9)


1 In the Switcher >Config menu, press [Side Flags].
The Side Flags menu appears.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

The status area lists the video/key pair numbers, video signal source
names, and aspect ratio settings (16:9/4:3).

2 Using any of the following methods, select the pair number for which you
want to make the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 V/K Pair No Selection of a V/K pair by its 1 to 128
number in the list
3 Num Selection of number of V/K pairs 1 to 128
in the list

• To select all of the pair numbers, press [ALL].

3 In the <Aspect> group, press [4:3].


If you select [16:9], no side flags are applied.

130 Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)


To set 4:3 video material to have side flags applied automatically
You can make a setting so that when a signal with aspect ratio set to 4:3 is
selected in the cross-point control block, side flags are automatically applied.
To do so, in the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu press [Auto Side Flags].
Pressing this button toggles the setting on and off.
This setting applies to all of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.

To set to crop to 4:3 when a DME wipe is executed


When side flags are enabled, you can automatically crop an image as set to be
a 4:3 image when executing a DME wipe.
To do so, in the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu press [Auto Crop].
Pressing this button toggles the setting on and off.
This setting applies to all of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.

Adjusting the width of the side flags


You can adjust the width of the side flags.

1 In the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu, press [Width].

2 Adjust the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Left Width of left side flag –100.00 to +100.00
4 Right Width of right side flag –100.00 to +100.00

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


5 All Width of both side flags Left value shown

Displaying the menu for enabling/disabling the side flags


In the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu, press [Misc >Enbl >Setup Flags].

Displaying the menu for assigning the side flags on/off function
to a cross-point button
In the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].

Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) 131


Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)

For setup relating to signal inputs, use the Switcher >Input menu.

To display the Input menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF2 ‘Input.’
The status area shows source numbers and source names, input signal phase,
and through mode on/off setting.

The following functions are available here.


• Input Phase Adjust: Carry out phase adjustment for each primary input.
• Through Mode: Set through mode for the input side. This applies only to
the primary inputs, and can be set independently for each primary input.
• Video Process: Switch video processing on or off for each input signal, and
adjust the brightness, hue and so forth.
• Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal
generated by the switcher internal matte generator.
• FC Adjust: Set the format converter inputs.

Making Phase Adjustment and Through Mode Settings


1
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

In the Switcher >Input menu, select the input signal to which the settings
apply.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Src No Input signal selection 1 to 49

The selected input signal appears in reverse video.

2 Press [Input Phase Adj].

3 To adjust the phase, adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Phase Input signal phase –16 to +16

4 To enable through mode, press [Through Mode], turning it on.

132 Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)


Making Video Process Settings
1 In the Switcher >Input menu, press [Video Process].
The Video Process menu appears.
The status area shows the source number, source name, and video process
adjustment settings.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the input signal to which the
settings apply.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Src No Input signal selection 1 to 49

3 Press [Video Process], turning it on.

4 Adjust the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –200.00 to +200.00

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –7.31 to +109.59

To set the parameter settings to their defaults, press [Unity].

Enabling the Illegal Color Limiter


To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the switcher
internal matte generator, press [Matte Illeg Col Limit] in the Switcher >Input
menu, turning it on.

Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) 133


Setting the Format Converter Inputs

Selecting the format converter inputs to be set (inputs 1 to 8)


1 Display the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu.

2 Using any of the following methods, select what the setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Input selection 1 and upwards

Making detailed settings for up-conversion


1 In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, select the input to which the
setting applies.

2 Press [Format Converter], turning it on.


This enables format conversion.

3 In the <Conversion> group, select one of the following.


Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Frame: Conversion in frame units


Field: Conversion in field units
Adaptive: Automatically switching between the above two modes

When Adaptive is selected, adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Motion Select Motion detection 1 to 3 a)
sensitivity

a) 1: Still priority mode, 2: Standard mode, 3: Motion priority mode

4 In the <Aspect> group, select one of the following.


Edge Crop: Add black bars on the left and right sides of a 4:3 aspect ratio
image to convert it to a 16:9 image.
Letter Box: Crop the top and bottom of a 4:3 aspect ratio image to convert
it to a 16:9 image.
Squeeze: Stretch a 4:3 image horizontally to covert it to a 16:9 image.

134 Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)


(For details of the image transformations, see the following figure.)

Original image (4:3) Up-converted image (16:9)


Edge Crop

Letter Box

Squeeze

Setting the image position in edge crop up-conversion mode


1 In the <Edge Crop Position> group of the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust
menu, press [Position], turning it on.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


2 Adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting format Setting values


2 EC Position Image position a) 1080 –120 to +120
720 –80 to +80

a) For down-conversion, the value is from –30 to +30 inclusive.

To return the edge crop image to the center


In the <Edge Crop Position> group, press [Center].

Setting the image position in letter box up-conversion mode


1 In the <Letter Box Position> group of the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust
menu, press [Position], turning it on.

Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) 135


2 Adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting format Setting values


2 LB Position Image position 1080i/59.94, –31 to +32
29.97PsF
1080i/50, –36 to + 36
25PsF
720P –30 to +30

To return the letterbox image to the center


In the <Letter Box Position> group, press [Center].

Making enhancer settings


1 In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, press [Enhancer], turning it on.

2 Set the following parameters.


Parameter group [1/2]

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Detail Gain Adjust the edge 0 to 127
enhancement
sharpness
3 Limiter Adjust the 0 to 63
maximum signal
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

level to be added
to the original
signal
4 Crisp Set the amplitude 0 to 15
value for which a
low-amplitude
signal is not
emphasized
5 Level Depend Set the luminance 0 to 15
range for edge
enhancement

Parameter group [2/2]

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Frequency Set the central 0 to 3
frequency for edge
enhancement
3 H/V Ratio Set the horizontal/ 0 to 7
vertical ratio for
edge
enhancement

136 Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)


Making detailed settings for down-conversion
1 In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, select the input to which the
setting applies.

2 Press [Format Converter], turning it on.


This enables format conversion.

3 In the <Aspect> group, select one of the following.


Edge Crop: Crop the left and right sides of a 16:9 image to convert it to a
4:3 image.
Letter Box 13:9: Crop the left and right sides of a 16:9 image to make a
13:9 image and add black bars at the top and bottom of the 13:9 image
to make a 4:3 image.
Letter Box 14:9: Crop the left and right sides of a 16:9 image to make a
14:9 image and add black bars on the top and bottom of the 14:9 image
to make a 4:3 image.
Letter Box 16:9: Add black bars on the top and bottom of a 16:9 image to
convert it to a 4:3 image.
Squeeze: Compress a 16:9 image horizontally to convert it to a 4:3 image.

(For details of the image transformations, see the following figure.)

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) 137


Original image (16:9) Down-converted image (4:3)
Edge Crop

Letter Box 13:9

Letter Box 14:9

Letter Box 16:9


Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Squeeze

For down-conversion, the image position setting in edge crop mode is the
same as for up-conversion. The value is from –30 to +30 inclusive. For
more details, see “Setting the image position in edge crop up-conversion
mode” (page 135).

For down-conversion, the enhancer settings are the same as for up-
conversion. For more details, see “Making enhancer settings” (page 136).

138 Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)


Making cross-conversion settings
To make the cross-conversion settings, carry out steps 1 and 2 described in
“Making detailed settings for up-conversion” (page 134). No other settings are
required.

Copying format converter input data


1 In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, press [Copy].
The Copy/Swap >Copy >Format Converter menu appears.
The status area shows lists of the copy source on the left, and the copy
destination on the right.

2 Select [Input] in the <Data Select> group.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the data.


• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Select the copy source data 1 and upwards
2 Right No Select the copy destination data 1 and upwards
3 Num Select the number of items 1 and upwards

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


4 Press [Copy].
This copies the data.

Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) 139


Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)

For setup relating to signal outputs, use the Switcher >Output menu.

To display the Output menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF3 ‘Output.’
The status area shows the output signal numbers and names for the signals
output from Output 1 to 24.

The following functions are available here.


• Output Assign: Assign the signals output from the Output1 to 24 ports.
• Video Clip: Adjust the clip levels (White Clip, Dark Clip, and Chroma Clip)
for the output signals from each of the Output1 to 24 ports.
• V Blank: Adjust the vertical blanking width for the output signals from each
of the Output1 to 24 ports. The setting is the number of scan lines from the
reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should
be masked.
• Through: Enable or disable through mode. Through mode can be enabled
for AUX1 to 48 outputs, M/E and PGM/PST program outputs, and clean
output.
• Safe Title: Enable or disable safe title, and carry out settings for box 1 and 2
and cross.
• 4:3 Crop: Set the actual video image to be cropped to a 4:3 aspect ratio when
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

an HD system has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3.


• FC Adjust: Set the format converter outputs.

Assigning Output Signals


To assign a signal to output from an output port, use the following procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Output menu, press [Output Assign].


The Output Assign menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and assigned signals on the left, and
a list of signals that can be assigned on the right.

2 In the <Output Assign> group, select either of the following.


[Re-Entry Source]: It is possible to make duplicate assignments.
M/E-1 Output 1 to 4 a)
M/E-2 Output 1 to 4 a)
M/E-3 Output 1 to 4 a)

140 Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)


PGM/PST 1 to 4 a)
DME Monitor Video
DME Monitor Key
Color Corrector 1 and 2
Undefined
Frame Memory 1 to 8
a) M/E output signals selected in the M/E Output Assign menu.

[Aux Bus]: It is not possible to make duplicate assignments.


Preset
Edit Preview
AUX 1 to 48

3 Using any of the following methods, select the output port number and
signal to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area to make the selection.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Output No Output port number 1 to 24
2 Source No Selection of signal to be assigned 1 and upwards

• For output ports not to be assigned, press [Inhibit].

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


The selected signal appears in reverse video.

4 Press [Set] to confirm the assignment.

Setting the Output Signal


In the following adjustment/setting operations, use any of the following
methods to select the output signal before making the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Output No Output port number selection 1 to 24

The selected output signal appears in reverse video.

Signal Output Settings (Output Menu) 141


Adjusting the video clip
To adjust the clip value for each of the output signals from the Output 1 to 24
ports, use the following procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Output menu, press [Video Clip].


The Video Clip menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and assigned signals, and the white
clip, dark clip, and chrominance clip values.

2 Adjust the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 White Clip Luminance signal white clip value 90.00 to 109.02
3 Dark Clip Luminance signal dark clip value –6.85 to +10.00
4 Chroma Clip Chrominance signal clip value 90.00 to 113.17

To set the values to the default values, press [Default].

Making vertical blanking interval adjustment and through mode


settings
1 In the Switcher >Output menu, press [V Blank/Through].
The V Blank/Through menu appears.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals, the vertical
blanking interval, and the through mode Enable/Disable status.

2 Press [V Blank Mask].

3 Adjust the parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Mask End Final value for vertical blanking See note a) below
interval

a) Depending on the signal format, the adjustment range varies as follows.


• 480i: 10 to 19
• 576i: 6 to 22
• 1080i: 7 to 20
• 720P: 7 to 25

To return the values to their defaults, press [Default].

4 To enable the through mode, press [Through Mode], setting it to Enable.


The through mode can be applied to the following outputs.

142 Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)


• Aux 1 to 48 outputs
• Program outputs of the M/E and PGM/PST rows
• Clean outputs of the M/E and PGM/PST rows

Making safe title settings


1 In the Switcher >Output menu, press [Safe Title].
The Safe Title menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals, with the
box 1, box 2, cross, and grid states.

2 To enable the safe title on/off setting made in the Misc menu, press [Safe
Title], turning it on.

3 Carry out either of the following operations.


To display a box: Press [Box1] or [Box2], turning it on.
In this case, carry out the following steps 4 and 5.
To display a cross: Press [Cross], turning it on.
To display a grid: Press [Grid], turning it on.
In this case, carry out the following steps 4 and 5.

4 When you selected [Box1] or [Box2] in step 3, adjust the following


parameters.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Box Size Box size 50.00 to 100.00
3 Luminance Display brightness 0.00 to 100.00 a)

a) Adjustable for Box2

When in step 3 you selected [Grid], in the <Grid Size> group, select one
of the following.
80.00%: Set the grid size to 80% of the screen frame
85.00%: Set the grid size to 85% of the screen frame
90.00%: Set the grid size to 90% of the screen frame
100.00%: Set the grid size to the full-screen size (100% of the screen
frame)

5 When in step 3 you selected [Box1] or [Box2], in the <Box1 Adjust> or


<Box2 Adjust> group, select the screen aspect ratio (16:9/14:9/4:3).
When in step 3 you selected [Grid], in the <Grid Adjust> group, select the
screen aspect ratio (16:9/4:3).

Signal Output Settings (Output Menu) 143


Cropping the image to a 4:3 aspect ratio in an HD system
In an HD system, to crop an image having a screen aspect ratio of 4:3 to an
aspect ratio of 4:3, use the following procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Output menu, press [4:3 Crop].


The 4:3 Crop menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and respective 4:3 Crop mode
settings.

2 Press [4:3 Crop], turning it on.


This enables the crop setting, and this is reflected in the status area.

Note
When the screen aspect ratio of 16:9 is selected for all M/E banks in the System
>Format >Active Line/Aspect menu, the setting of 4:3 Crop is disabled.

Setting the format converter outputs

To set the format converter


Display the Switcher >Output >FC Adjust menu. The subsequent operations
are the same as for the format converter input settings, except that you can not
disable the format converter settings.
For details of the operations, see “Setting the Format Converter Inputs” (page
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

134).

To copy format converter output data

1 In the Switcher >Output >FC Adjust menu, press [Copy].


The Copy/Swap >Copy >Format Converter menu appears.

2 In the <Data Select> group, press [Output].

3 Use the same operations as in steps 3 and 4 of “Copying format converter


input data” (page 139) to copy the data.

144 Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)


Settings Relating to Video Switching
(Transition Menu)

For settings relating to video switching, use the Switcher >Transition menu.

To display the Transition menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF4 ‘Transition.’
The status area shows the transition preview, key transition, bus toggle, and
split fader settings for each M/E and PGM/PST bank.

The following functions are available here.


• Transition Preview: Specify the operation mode for transition preview for
each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
• Key Transition: Specify the operation mode for independent key
transitions.
• Bus Toggle: Switch the bus toggle for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks
on or off.
• Preset Color Mix: Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix, the key status
for a transition including a key, and the mode in which the transition type
after a transition ends returns to the previous setting.
• Transition Curve: Set the relationship when carrying out a transition,
between the fader lever position and the advancement state of the transition.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings
In the Transition menu, using any of the following methods, select the bank to
which the settings apply, then make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank M/E or P/P selection to which settings apply 1 to 4

The selected bank appears in reverse video.

Setting the transition preview mode


To select the transition preview mode, in the <Transition Preview> group of
the Transition menu, select either of the following.
One Time: The transition preview ends after a single transition.

Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu) 145


Normal: Switching the [TRANS PVW] button on or off switches between the
transition preview mode and the normal mode.

Selecting the transition mode of the independent key transition


control block
To select the key transition mode, select either of the following in the <Key
Transition> group of the Transition menu.
Same: The transition settings for the On and Off directions are the same.
Independ: The transition settings for the On and Off directions can be set
separately.

Selecting the background transition flip-flop mode


In the Transition menu, press [Bus Toggle], to switch between on and off.
On: Flip-flop mode
Off: Bus fixed mode
For more details, see “Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode” in Chapter
3 (Volume 1).

Setting the split fader to be enabled or disabled


In the Transition menu, press [Split Fader] to switch between Enable and
Disable. This setting is only valid when using a simple transition module with
Bus Toggle set to Off.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Note
This setting is disabled for the CCP-9000/9000A.

Enable: When the fader lever is split, the split fader effect is enabled.
Disable: Even when the fader lever is split, the normal fader lever effect is
obtained.

Enabling or disabling the fade-to-black function

In the <FTB> group of the Transition menu, press the program output name to
toggle between On and Off.

Note
This setting is disabled for the CCP-9000/9000A.

On: When the [FTB] button is pressed, a fade-to-black is carried out.


Off: Even when the [FTB] button is pressed, no fade-to-black is carried out.

146 Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu)


Note
The PGM2 to PGM4 settings are only valid in Multi Program mode.

Setting a preset color mix


1 In the Switcher >Transition menu, press [Preset Color Mix].
The Preset Color Mix menu appears.
The status area shows the stroke mode setting for each M/E bank, the
setting for whether or not the key status is maintained, and the one-time
mode setting.

2 In the <Stroke Mode> group, select whether to carry out a transition in one
stroke or two strokes.
Normal: Carry out a preset color mix with two transition operations.
Single: Carry out a preset color mix with a single transition operation.

Note
In bus fixed mode (see page 146), the setting is fixed to “Single.”

3 In the <Non Drop Key> group, select the key setting for a transition
including a key.
To carry out the transition with the key state maintained, press [Key1] to
[Key4], turning them on. (See “Transition Types” in Chapter 1 (Volume

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


1).)

4 If each time a transition ends the transition type is to return to the previous
setting, press [One Time Enable].

Settings relating to fader lever operations


To select the way in which the fader lever position and the transition progress
are related, use the following procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Transition menu, press [Transition Curve].


The Transition Curve menu appears.

2 In the <Fader Curve> group, select the fader lever operation mode.
Normal: The transition progress is linear, according to the fader lever
position. (Factory default setting)
Adv Tally Mode: When the fader lever is moved from the end of its travel,
the tally is output slightly before the transition starts.

Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu) 147


Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame
Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/
FM/CCR Menu)

For settings relating to keys, wipes, frame memory and Color Correction, use
the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu.

To display the Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF5 ‘Key/Wipe/
FM/CCR.’
The status area shows the key memory settings, mask and border processing
order, key priority, cross-point hold, pattern limit transition, and wipe edge
settings for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.

The following functions are available here.


• Key Memory: Set the key memory operation mode for each of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.
• Video Proc Memory: Enable or disable video process memory.
• Show Key: Enable or disable show key for edit preview, M/E and P/P Pvw/
K-Pvw.
• Key Auto Drop: For each M/E or PGM/PST bank, specify a key to be turned
off automatically when you press a cross-point button for the bus to be output
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

as the background.
• Mask/Border Process: Set the processing order of masks and borders for
each M/E or PGM/PST bank.
• Key Priority: Set the key priority operation mode for each of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.
• Xpt Hold mode: Set the operation mode for the cross-point hold button
provided on the key bus for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
• Pattern Limit Transition: Set the operation mode when the pattern limit is
released for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
• CCR Internal Signal Enable: Select whether signals generated internally to
the switcher can be selected as input material to the color corrector.
• FM Auto Store: Switch on or off the function to automatically attach a name
and save in frame memory.

Switching Video Process Memory On or Off


In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Video Proc Memory],
turning it on.

148 Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)
Settings for the Show Key Function
1 In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Show Key].
The Show Key menu appears.

2 In the <Show Key Enable> group, press the signal for which “show key”
is enabled, turning it on.

3 To set the time for which “show key” is held, press [Hold Time].

4 Adjust the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Hold Time Show key hold time 0 to 999 (frames)

Settings for Key Auto Drop Function


The “key auto drop” function automatically switches off a particular key when
you press a cross-point button in a bus that outputs the background on the
particular switcher bank (PGM/PST, or M/E-1 to M/E-3).
When the background output bus is in flip-flop mode, this is always the A bus.
In bus-fixed mode, it is either the A bus or the B bus depending on the fader

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


lever position.
For details of bus-fixed mode, see “Executing a Transition” in Chapter 3
(Volume 1).

1 In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Key Auto Drop].


The Key Auto Drop menu appears.

Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu) 149
2 In the <Key Auto Drop> group, press the name of the keyer for which you
want the key to be deleted automatically, turning it on.

Automatically Naming and Saving to Frame Memory


In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [FM Auto Store], turning it
on.

Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings


In the following procedures, select the bank to which the settings apply using
any of the following methods, then make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting
values
1 Bank M/E or P/P selection to which settings apply 1 to 4

The selected bank appears in reverse video.


Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Selecting the key memory mode


In the <Key Memory> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu,
select one from Full (full mode)/Simple (simple mode)/Off.
For more details, see “Key Memory” in Chapter 4 (Volume 1).

Selecting the processing order of masks and borders


In the <Mask/Border Process> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
menu, select one of the following.
Mask >Border: Apply the Mask effect, then apply the Border effect.
Border >Mask: Apply the Border effect, then apply the Mask effect.

Selecting the key priority operation mode


In the <Key Priority> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, select
one of the following.
Normal: The key priority sequence can be varied freely.
Fix: Fixed at currently set priority sequence.

150 Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)
Setting the operation mode of the key bus [XPT HOLD] button
In the <Xpt Hold Mode> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu,
select any of the following. This setting is applied for the attributes of
snapshots as well as the operation mode of [XPT HOLD] button.
Key Disable: The [XPT HOLD] button of the key bus functions not only as a
cross-point hold button but also as a key disable button. When the [XPT
HOLD] button is on, recalling a snapshot or keyframe effect does not
reflect the key settings, including the cross-point selection information.
Key Disable with Status: Same as [Key Disable], and further disables the
reflection of the key on/off status.
Xpt Hold: The [XPT HOLD] button of the key bus functions as a cross-point
hold button. When the [XPT HOLD] is on, recalling a snapshot or
keyframe effect does not reflect the cross-point selection information.

To change the cross-point hold attribute of a snapshot


If you select “Key Disable” above, this also applies key disable to the cross-
point hold attribute.
If you select “Key Disable With Status,” the key disable function is applied,
including the key on/off status.

Note
This setting is only reflected in the operation of the [XPT HOLD] button when
the [XPT HOLD] button operating mode is set to “All Bus.” (See page 117.)
Note that the snapshot cross-point hold attribute is also valid for settings other
than “All Bus.”

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


Setting the operation mode when the pattern limit is released
In the <Pattern Limit Transition> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
menu, select either of the following operation modes.
Auto: When the pattern limit is released, the remainder of the transition is
carried out automatically at a special-purpose transition rate.
Manual: After the pattern limit is released, the transition waits for the next
operation, then executes. Until you move the fader lever or press [AUTO
TRANS], the transition is not executed.

Setting the mode in which all signals can be selected for input to
the color corrector
Press [CCR Internal Signal Enable] in the Switcher > Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
menu, turning it on.
You can select signals generated internally to the switcher as material for input
to the color corrector.

Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu) 151
Note
When you select an M/E reentry signal as material for input to the color
corrector, 1H delay occurs to the output signal of M/E.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

152 Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)
Settings Relating to Function Links (Link
Menu)

Carry out setup relating to links by displaying the Switcher >Link menu.

To display the Link menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF6 ‘Link.’
The status area shows the current link information.

The following functions are available here.


• Internal Bus Link: Make a setting of the bus link function that links
together two buses internal to the switcher.
• GPI Link: Make settings for linking any cross-point buttons or [CUT] and
[AUTO TRANS] buttons in the cross-point control block and GPI output
ports.
• M/E Link: Make settings to link together two M/E banks.
• Key Trans Link: Make settings to link key transitions.

Setting a Cross-Point Button Link

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


To link together two buses internal to the switcher, use the following
procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Link menu, press [Internal Bus Link].


The Internal Bus Link menu appears.
The status area shows the link source and link destination buses, and link
table information.

2 Using any of the following methods, select what setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number 1 to 64

3 Press [Link Bus Select].


The Link Bus Select menu appears.

Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu) 153


The status area lists the current setting status of the selected link and the
buses that can be selected.

4 In the <Bus Select> group, select [Master Bus] (link source bus).

5 Using any of the following methods, select the bus to be the link source,
and press [Bus Set].
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Bus selection 1 to 190 a)

a) Only when [Master Bus] is selected, M/E-1 to M/E-3 Trans PGM, and P/P Trans PGM are
available.
Only when [Linked Bus] is selected, AUX 1 to AUX 48 as Key and MON 1 to MON 8 as
Key are available.

Note
With one of M/E-1 to M/E-3 Trans PGM and P/P Trans PGM selected
for [Master Bus], the link setting become effective as soon as you start
moving the fader lever.

6 In the <Bus Select> group, select [Linked Bus] (link destination bus).

7
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Referring to step 5, select the bus to be the link destination, and press [Bus
Set].

8 Turn the knob to select the link table, and press [Link Table Set].

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Link Table No Link table selection 1 to 8

For more information about link tables, see the following item.

The selected link table number is confirmed, and this is reflected in the
status area.

To delete a link
Select the link you want to delete, then press [Clear] in the Switcher >Link
>Internal Bus Link menu.

154 Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu)


Making Link Table Settings
1 In the Switcher >Link >Internal Bus Link menu, press [Link Table Select].
The Link Table Select menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the link source and link
destination signals.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Main No Video/key signal for link source 1 to 128
5 No Video/key signal for link destination 1 to 128

3 To confirm the selection, press [Link Src Set].


This links the link destination signal to the signal selected as Main No.

To initialize the set source address


In the Switcher >Link >Link Table Select menu, press [Init Link Table].
A confirmation message appears; press [Yes].
The source addresses are reassigned, and this is reflected in the status area.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


To change the link number and link table number
In this menu too, you can change the link number and link table number. To do
this, turn the knobs as follows to make the setting, then press [Link Table Set].

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Link No Link to which setting applies 1 to 64
3 Link Table No Link table selection 1 to 8

Linking Cross-Point Buttons and GPI Output Ports


To link cross-point buttons or the [CUT] and [AUTO TRANS] buttons in the
cross-point control block, and GPI output ports, use the following procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Link menu, press [GPI Link], to display the Switcher
>Link >GPI Link menu.
The status area shows the output ports and the link status, and delay value
information.

Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu) 155


2 Using any of the following methods, select the GPI output port.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 GPI Port GPI output port selection 1 to 8

3 Press [GPI Link Adjust].


The GPI Link Adjust menu appears.
The status area shows the current setting state of the selected link, and a
list of the selectable video names or button names, together with the GPI
link Enable/Disable setting for each bus.

4 Using any of the following methods, select what the setting applies to. For
each GPI port there can be up to eight links.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 GPI Port GPI output port selection 1 to 8
2 Link No Link number selection 1 to 8
3 Video/Button No Selection of video or 1 to 136 a)
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

button name to be linked

a) These include main pair numbers 1 to 128, and “Cut” and “Auto Trans” on each bank.

5 In the <Video/Button> group, press [Select].


The selected video or button name is reflected in the status area.

To clear a video/button name link


Make the selection to which the setting applies, then in the <Video/
Button> group press [Clear].

6 To select for each bus whether the GPI link setting is enabled or disabled,
use any of the following methods to select the bus to which the setting
applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

156 Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Bus Bus selection 1 to 114

7 In the <Bus> group, select any of the following.


Enable: Enable the GPI link setting for the selected bus.
Disable: Disable the GPI link setting for the selected bus.
All Enable: Enable the GPI link setting for all buses.

Setting the delay value


1 In the Switcher >Link >GPI Link Adjust menu, turn the knobs to select the
output port for which you want to set the delay value, and the
corresponding delay value.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 GPI Port GPI output port for the 1 to 8
setting
5 Delay Delay value for the output 0 to 300 (fields)
port

2 Press [Delay Set].


This confirms the delay value, which is reflected in the status area.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


Making a Setting for Linking Two M/E Banks
You can link any two M/E banks for some operations by using the Switcher
>Link >M/E Link menu.
The operations for which you can link two M/E banks are as follows.
• Transition execution (auto transition, cut, and fader lever operation)
• Next transition selection
• Transition type selection

Note
Clip transition execution is excluded from the above transition execution
operations.

1 In the Switcher >Link menu, press [M/E Link].


The M/E Link menu appears.
The status area displays a link list showing link source banks (M/E and
PGM/PST) and link destination banks, and a selection list.

Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu) 157


2 Using any of the following methods, select the link number you want to
set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number selection 1 to 8

3 In the <M/E Select> group, select [Master M/E] (link source).

4 Using any of the following methods, select the M/E or PGM/PST bank you
want to be the link source, then press [M/E Set].
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Bank selection 1 to 4 a)

a) 1: M/E-1
2: M/E-2
3: M/E-3
4: PGM/PST

5 In the <M/E Select> group, select [Linked M/E] (link destination).


Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

6 In the same way as in step 4, select the M/E or PGM/PST bank you want
to be the link destination, then press [M/E Set].

To link the banks not only for transition execution but also for the
other operations
Press [Transition Only], turning it off.

To release the link setting


Use the same operation as in step 2 to select the link number for which you
want to release the link setting, then press [Clear].

Making a Link Setting for Key Transition


You can make a link setting for key transition by using the Switcher >Link
>Key Transition Link menu.
The operations for which you can link two banks are the following independent
key transition operations.

158 Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu)


• Auto transition
• Turning the key on or off
• Fader lever operation (on the downstream key control block)

1 In the Switcher >Link menu, press [Key Trans Link].


The Key Transition Link menu appears.
The status area displays a link list showing link sources and link
destinations, and a key selection list.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the link number you want to
set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number selection 1 to 32

3 In the <Key Select> group, select [Master Key] (link source).

4 Using any of the following, select the key you want to be the link source,
then press [Key Set].
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Key number selection 1 to 16 a)

a) The keys and their numbers selectable as link source/link destination are as follows.
M/E-1 Key1 (1), M/E-1 Key2 (2), M/E-1 Key3 (3), M/E-1 Key4 (4), M/E-2 Key1 (5),
M/E-2 Key2 (6), M/E-2 Key3 (7), M/E-2 Key4 (8), M/E-3 Key1 (9), M/E-3 Key2 (10),
M/E-3 Key3 (11), M/E-3 Key4 (12), DSK1 (13), DSK2 (14), DSK3 (15), and DSK4
(16)

5 In the <Key Select> group, select [Linked Key] (link destination).

6 In the same way as in step 4, select the key you want to be the link
destination, then press [Key Set].

To release the link setting


Use the same operation as in step 2 to select the link number for which you
want to release the link setting, then press [Clear].

Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu) 159


Interfacing With External Devices (Device
Interface Menu)

To carry out setup relating to connections with external devices, display the
Switcher >Device Interface menu.

To display the Device Interface menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF7 ‘Device
Interface.’

The following functions are available here.


• Remote Assign: Set the use of the two 9-pin ports.
• GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
• GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
• Aux Control: Set whether operations on the AUX buses from the two 9-pin
ports are inhibited.
• DME Type Setting: When the second DME is an MVE-9000 or MVE-
8000A, set the AUX bus outputs and reentry inputs for an SDI interface.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Making 9-Pin Port Device Interface Settings


The description in this section takes the REMOTE1 port as an example. For
other REMOTE ports, carry out the same process as required.

1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [Remote Assign].


The Remote Assign menu appears.

2 Select the device interface you want to set for the REMOTE1 port from the
<Remote1> group.
Editor A: assign Editor A to the REMOTE1 port.
Editor B: assign Editor B to the REMOTE1 port.
AUX: assign AUX to the REMOTE1 port.
DME1: assign DME1 to the REMOTE1 port.

160 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


Note
When REMOTE1 and REMOTE2 are respectively assigned to DME1 and
DME2, you can switch the AUX bus from the DME (DME-3000/7000)
connected to these ports.
At this time, connect the DME input video signals and key signals as follows.
• DME1 video input: AUX1 output
• DME1 key input: AUX2 output
• DME2 video input: AUX4 output
• DME2 key input: AUX5 output
Note that for a DME external video signal, you can select any of AUX1 to
AUX14 on the DME. Connect to the selected AUX bus.

Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings


The same GPI input is used for switcher processor control and for DME
control.

1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Input].


The GPI Input menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8
2 No Selection of number for action to be 1 to 8
assigned

3 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger type.


(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.

(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input


pulse.

(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the


input signal.

(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 161


4 In the <Target> group, select the action block.
M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, P/P: Set the action for one of the banks.
Common/Setup: Set an action for something other than the above, or a
setup action.

5 Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
1 to 99 c)

a) As for the setting values, see “Selectable actions for various trigger types” (page 162).
b) When knob 3 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 3 selection is “Snapshot” or “Effect”

6 Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.


The selected setting appears in the status area.

Selectable actions for various trigger types


• When the trigger type is other than “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Cut, Auto Trans
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Key1 Cut, Key1 Auto Trans, Key2 Cut, Key2 Auto Trans, Key3 Cut,
Key3 Auto Trans, Key4 Cut, Key4 Auto Trans
SS ? Recall, Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3 SS ? Recall,
Key4 SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind,
KF Reverse Run, No Action
When Target is P/P: Cut, Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut, DSK1 Auto Trans, DSK2 Cut, DSK2 Auto Trans, DSK3
Cut, DSK3 Auto Trans, DSK4 Cut, DSK4 Auto Trans
FTB Cut, FTB Auto Trans
SS ? Recall, DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall,
DSK4 SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind,
KF Reverse Run, No Action
When Target is Common/Setup: FM Src1 Field Freeze, FM Src1 Frame
Freeze, FM Src2 Field Freeze, FM Src2 Frame Freeze
FM Src1 Freeze Off, FM Src2 Freeze Off
FM Src1 Clip Record, FM Src1 Clip Stop, FM Src2 Clip Record, FM
Src2 Clip Stop, FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup, FM1 to FM8 Clip Play, FM1

162 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


to FM8 Clip Stop,
User1 to 8 SS ? Recall, User1 to 8 EFF ? Recall, User1 to 8 EFF ?
Recall & Run, User1 to 8 KF Run, User1 to 8 KF Stop, User1 to 8 KF
Rewind, User1 to 8 KF Reverse Run, No Action
• When the trigger type is “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, or P/P: Aspect
No Action
When Target is Common/Setup: Format, Aspect, Level Enable, No Action

Notes
• “Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the “Aspect” and “Format” actions
that can be used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used,
if the input is “Disable” then it is not possible to switch “Aspect” or “Format”
by GPI input.
If a GPI to switch “Aspect” or “Format” occurs when powering the system
off, the action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power
goes off and the power may go off before the action is completed. This may
corrupt the setup settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable
to avoid such a situation.
• If “Format” is selected for “Action” when the format converter is used, you
can set the conversion formats of the format converter for “FC Input 1-8”.

Carrying out level settings


To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


the following procedure.

1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, select the action to be set, and
press [H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Selection of setting for action 1 and upwards

3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is high, press [H Set].
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low, press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 163


Notes
• When the action is “Format,” these settings conflict with the current
settings, but after making the settings, agreement is restored after a pulse
change or power off/on.
• When the Action is “Bkgd A Side Flags” or “Bkgd B Side Flags,” the
levels are fixed, as follows.
High level: Off
Low level: On

Making Switcher Processor GPI Output Settings


1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Output].
The GPI Output menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8

3 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.


Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

(Rising Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open-


circuit or drives the output high, and holds this state for the
specified pulse width.
(Falling Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted
or drives the output low, and holds this state for the specified
pulse width.
(Any Edge): Each time the trigger occurs, the relay contacts are
alternately closed or opened, or the output is switched between
high and low.
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the output.

4 Turn the knobs to select the pulse width and timing to be set.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 (fields)
4 Timing Output timing 1 to 3 a)

164 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


a) 1: Field 1, 2: Field 2, 3: Any

When “ ” is selected as the trigger polarity, there is no Pulse Width


setting. When “Status” is selected, there is no Pulse Width or Timing
setting.

5 In the <Source> group, select the action block.


M/E-1 to M/E-3 and P/P: Set an action for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Common: Set an action for error status.

6 Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.


• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
1 to 99 c)

a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Status”


When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Cut, Auto Trans
Key1 Cut, Key1 Auto Trans, Key2 Cut, Key2 Auto Trans, Key3 Cut, Key3 Auto
Trans, Key4 Cut, Key4 Auto Trans
Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3 SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, No Action

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


When Source is P/P: Cut, Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut, DSK1 Auto Trans, DSK2 Cut, DSK2 Auto Trans, DSK3 Cut, DSK3
Auto Trans, DSK4 Cut, DSK4 Auto Trans
FTB Cut, FTB Auto Trans
DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4 SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, No Action
When Source is Common: No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Status”
When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2 or M/E-3: Key1 On, Key2 On, Key3 On, Key4 On
No Action
When Source is P/P: DSK1 On, DSK2 On, DSK3 On, DSK4 On
No Action
When Source is Common: Error Make, Error Break, No Action
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 2 selection is “Snapshot” or “Effect”

7 Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.


The selected setting appears in the status area.

Test firing the trigger


To test fire the trigger, press [Test Fire].

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 165


This outputs a trigger from the selected output port. This is not output when the
trigger type is “Status.”

Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control


1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [Aux Control].
The Aux Control menu appears.

2 Select the 9-pin port for the setting, from the <Control> group.
Remote1: Make the settings for the REMOTE1 port.
Remote2: Make the settings for the REMOTE2 port.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the AUX bus.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No AUX bus selection 0 to 48 a)

a) 0: EDIT PVW
1 to 48: AUX1 to AUX48
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

4 Select whether to enable or disable AUX bus control from the <Control
Mode> group.
Enable: enable control of the port selected in step 2.
Disable: disable control of the port selected in step 2.
Manual: make whether control of the port selected in step 2 is possible or
not depend on the setting in the Misc menu.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as required to make the settings for other ports.

Setting the Interface Between the DME and the Switcher

This system has a built-in DME that can be used for the dedicated interface, but
if also using an MVE-8000A or MVE-9000 as an external DME, it is necessary
to make the settings for interfacing to the switcher.
When using the MKS-6470, no settings are necessary.

166 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


Select the signal input to the DME (AUX bus output) and the signal returned
as the switcher primary input (reentry input) as follows.

1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [DME SDI Interface].


The DME SDI Interface menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the DME channel to which
operations apply.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 DME Ch No DME channel selection 1 to 24

Note
When using the MVE-8000A, it is not possible to select any of DME 5 Ext
In to DME 8 Ext In.

3 In the <Select> group, select the AUX bus or reentry to be assigned to the
DME channel.
Aux Bus: Set AUX bus.
Re-Entry: Set reentry.

Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)


4 Depending on the selection in step 2, use any of the following methods to
make the setting.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

• When Aux Bus is selected


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Src No AUX bus number 0 to 48

• When Re-Entry is selected


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Src No Reentry number 0 to 49

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 167


5 Press [Set].
In the list on the right of the status area, the selected content is reflected in
the specified DME channel.

Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.

Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys Upon


Receiving the Editor Command
Selects the mode for turning off keys when an “All Stop” command is received
from the editor.

1 In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [Editor I/F].


The Editor I/F menu appears.

2 Select one of the following modes.


All: When an “All Stop” command is received, all keys for the selected
regions are turned off.
Specified: When an “All Stop” command is received, among all the keys
for the selected regions, only the keys specified by the editor are
turned off.
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)

Note
When an “All Stop” command is received in the process of a transition, the
keys selected for the next transition are also turned off.

168 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)
Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu) ...................................170
Setting the Initial Crop ......................................................................170
Setting an Illegal Color Limit for Matte Signals ...............................171
Making DME System Phase Adjustment ..........................................171
Setting the TBC Window Center Position ........................................171
Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu) .............................173
Adjusting the Monitor Output ...........................................................173
Setting the Monitor Output ................................................................174
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) ...............175
Making DME GPI Input Settings ......................................................176
Making DME GPI Output Settings ...................................................178
Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input
Menu)

To make settings relating to DME input signals, display the DME >Input
menu.

To display the Input menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF4 ‘DME’ and HF1 ‘Input.’
The status area shows the initial crop information and the DME system phase.

The following functions are available here.


• Initial Crop: Make the initial crop setting.
• Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter for the signal generated
by the DME internal matte generator on or off.
• System Phase: Adjust the operation timing of the whole system with respect
to the reference signal.
• TBC Center: Set the TBC window center position.

In the following, the settings for DME1 are explained. (It is not necessary to
make settings for DME2.)

Setting the Initial Crop


1 In the DME1 <Aspect> group of the DME >Input menu, select the screen
aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3).

2 In the DME1 <Crop> group, press [Initial Crop] and adjust the following
parameters.
Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)

• If you selected 4:3 in step 1


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top side –3.00 to +3.00
2 Left Position of left side –4.00 to +4.00
3 Right Position of right side –4.00 to +4.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom side –3.00 to +3.00

170 Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu)


• If you selected 16:9 in step 1
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top side –9.00 to +9.00
2 Left Position of left side –16.00 to
+16.00
3 Right Position of right side –16.00 to
+16.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom side –9.00 to +9.00

To return the parameter values to their default values


Press [Unity] in the <Crop> group.

Setting an Illegal Color Limit for Matte Signals


To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the DME internal
matte generator, press [Matte Illeg Col Limit] for DME1 in the DME >Input
menu, turning it on.

Making DME System Phase Adjustment


To adjust the DME reference phase, use the following procedure.

1 In the DME >Input menu, press [System Phase].

2 Set the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 DME1 DME1 system phase adjustment –32.00 to +96.00

Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)


Phase
2 DME2 DME2 system phase adjustment –32.00 to +96.00
Phase

Setting the TBC Window Center Position


When the MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 is connected through SDI interface, the
DME >Input >TBC Center menu allows you to set the TBC window center
position.

Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu) 171


1 In the DME >Input menu, press [TBC Center].
The TBC Center menu appears.
The status area shows the TBC center position values for DME1, DME 2,
and external input signals.

Note
The TBC center position values for external input signals are shown only
when an SDI-interfaced MVE-9000 is used.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the input number for which you
want to set the TBC center position.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Input number selection 1 to 4

3 In the <Video/Key> group (when an SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/9000 is


used) or the <External Video> group (when an SDI-interfaced MVE-9000
is used), press the desired button, and set the TBC center position to 0H,
0.5H, or 1H.
Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)

172 Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu)


Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output
Menu)

To make settings relating to DME output signals, display the DME >Output
menu.

To display the Output menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF4 ‘DME’ and HF3 ‘Output.’
These settings are possible only when the DME is an MVE-9000 or SDI-
interfaced MVE-8000A.

The following functions are available here.


• Monitor Output: Set the signals output from the four monitor output
connectors.
• Clip Adjust: Adjust the clip level of DME2 output.

Adjusting the Monitor Output


When the MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 is connected through SDI interface, you
can adjust DME2 output video clip level.
Use the following procedure.

1 In the <DME2(Ch5-Ch8)> group of the DME >Output menu, press [Clip


Adjust], turning it on.

2 Set the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values

Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)


1 White Clip White clip adjustment 90.00 to 109.02
2 Dark Clip Dark clip adjustment −6.85 to +10.00
3 Chroma Clip Chroma clip adjustment 90.00 to 113.17

To return the setting to the default value


In the DME >Output menu, press [Default].

Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu) 173


Setting the Monitor Output
To set the signals output from the four monitor output connectors, use the
following procedure.

Note
This setting is valid when an SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A or an MVE-9000 is
used.

1 In the DME >Output menu, press [Monitor Output].


The Monitor Output menu appears.

2 In the list on the left of the status area, press directly on the monitor output
for which you want to make setting.

3 In the list on the right of the status area, press directly on the signal you
want to output.

4 Press [Set].
The selection is reflected in the monitor output.
Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)

174 Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu)


Interfacing With External Devices (Device
Interface Menu)

To carry out setup relating to DME connections with external devices, display
the DME >Device Interface menu.

To display the Device Interface menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF4 ‘DME’ and HF4 ‘Device
Interface.’

The following functions are available here.


• Editor Protocol: Set the protocol to be used on the Editor port.
• Editor Port Setting: Make settings relating to the control of the editor ports
installed in the DME.
• GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
• GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the
action settings.
Note
The MKS-6470 does not have a GPI Output function.

In the following, the settings for DME1 are explained. (It is not necessary to
make settings for DME2.)

Setting the editor protocol


In the <DME1 Editor Protocol> group of the DME >Device Interface menu,
press the following buttons to make the setting.
DME: Control by DME protocol through the editor port.
VTR: Control by VTR protocol through the editor port.

Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)


Making editor port settings
In the <DME1 Editor Port Setting> group of the DME >Device Interface menu,
press either of the following to select the way in which the editor ports are used.
Common: Control all of channels 1 to 4 through Editor ports 1 to 4.
Independ: Control channels 1 to 4 individually through Editor ports 1 to 4.

Note
On the MKS-6470, Editor ports 1 and 2 are supported.

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 175


Making DME GPI Input Settings
1 In the DME >Device Interface menu, press [DME1 GPI Input].
The DME1 GPI Input menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Input port selection 1 to 8
2 No Selection of number for action to 1 to 8
be assigned

3 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.


(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.

(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input


pulse.

(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the


input signal.

(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.

4 In the <Target> group, select what this applies to (channels 1 to 4, or Proc).

5 Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.


Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)

• Press directly on the list in the status area.


• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Reg No Register number 1 to 99 b)
1 to 399 c)

a) As for the setting values, see “Selectable actions for various trigger types” (page 177).
b) When knob 3 selection is “Snapshot”
c) When knob 3 selection is “Effect”

176 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


6 Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
The selected setting appears in the status area.

Selectable actions for various trigger types


• When the trigger type is other than “Level”
When Target is Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4: Freeze, SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind,
KF Reverse Run, No Action
When Target is Proc: No Action
• When the trigger type is “Level”
When Target is Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4: Aspect, No Action
When Target is Proc: Format (frame/field rate, number of lines)
Aspect, Level Enable, No Action

Note
“Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the “Aspect” and “Format” actions that
can be used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used, if the
input is “Disable” then it is not possible to switch “Aspect” or “Format” by GPI
input.
If a GPI to switch “Aspect” or “Format” occurs when powering the system off,
the action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes
off and the power may go off before the action is completed. This may corrupt
the setup settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid
such a situation.

Carrying out level settings


To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.

1 In the DME >Device Interface menu, select the action to be set, and press
[H/L Set].

Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)


The H/L Set menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Signal format/screen aspect ratio 1 and upwards
selection

Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) 177


3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is high, press [H Set].
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low, press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.

Making DME GPI Output Settings

Note
DME1 does not have a GPI output.

1 In the DME >Device Interface menu, press [DME2 GPI Output].


The DME2 GPI Output menu appears.
The output port selection is fixed at 1.

2 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.


Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the action you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 to 3 a)

a) Error Make, Error Break, No Action

4 Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.


The selected setting appears in the status area.
Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)

178 Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)


Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)
Setup Relating to DCU .............................................................................180
Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu) ....................181
Assigning a GPI Input Port ...............................................................181
Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Input Port ..................................182
GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu) .........................................183
Making DCU GPI Input Settings ......................................................183
Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu) ...................................187
Assigning a GPI Output Port .............................................................187
Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Output Port ...............................188
GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu) ...................................189
Making DCU GPI Output Settings ....................................................189
Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) .....................................192
Making Serial Port Settings ...............................................................192
Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial
Port .........................................................................................194
Setup Relating to DCU

In DCU setup, carry out settings particular to the DCU.


You can make the following settings.
• Input Config: Assign GPI inputs to Parallel input ports.
• GPI Input Assign: Make GPI input settings.
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

• Output Config: Assign GPI outputs to parallel output ports inserted in an


option slot.
• GPI Output Assign: Make GPI output settings.
• Serial Port Assign: Set the protocol to match the devices connected to a 9-
pin serial port. You can also select the control panel used to control each
device.

Note
For setup relating to DCU, it is necessary to make the same settings on multiple
control panels (maximum three units) that are sharing the DCU. After carrying
out the DCU setup on one control panel, make the same settings on the other
control panels.

180 Setup Relating to DCU


Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input
Config Menu)

To assign GPI inputs to DCU parallel input ports, display the DCU >Input
Config menu.

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


The DCU parallel input ports are assigned with the following priority
sequence.
1. When external boxes are set in the Router/Tally >Router >External Box
Assign menu, the parallel inputs are assigned to the external box inputs in
order.
2. When tally settings are carried out in the Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu,
tally inputs are assigned automatically.

In this menu, you set only the input ports which are unused after making the
above assignments.

To display the Input Config menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF1 ‘Input Config.’
The status area shows input port information.

Assigning a GPI Input Port


1 In the DCU >Input Config menu, select what the setting applies to (DCU1
or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 In the <Parallel Input Assign> group, press [GPI Input].

3 Using any of the following methods, assign the number of the GPI input to
the input port.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Parallel Input Input port 1 to 102 a)
3 GPI Input GPI input 1 to 50

a) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select a value in the range 1 to 34.

4 To confirm the assignment in step 3, press [GPI Input Set].

Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu) 181


This assigns the GPI input, and this is reflected in the status area.

Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Input Port


1 In the DCU >Input Config menu, select what the setting applies to (DCU1
or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

2 In the <Parallel Input Assign> group, if [GPI Input] is on, press it to turn
it off.

3 Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 From No First port number 1 to To No
2 To No Last port number From No to 102

4 In the <Parallel Input Assign> group, press [No Assign].

182 Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu)


GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)

To set the trigger type and so on for each GPI input, display the DCU >GPI
Input Assign menu.

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


To display the GPI Input Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF2 ‘GPI Input
Assign.’
The GPI input port setting status appears in the status area.

Making DCU GPI Input Settings


1 In the DCU >GPI Input Assign menu, using any of the following methods
select what the setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No GPI input 1 to 50

2 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.


(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.

(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input


pulse.

(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the


input signal.

(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.

3 In the <Target Device> group, select the control panel to handle the GPI
input.
SCU1: ID1 control panel (PNL1)
SCU2: ID2 control panel (PNL2)
SCU3: ID3 control panel (PNL3)

GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu) 183


The action set in the following step 4 is executed for the switcher and DME
controlled by the selected control panel.

4 Using any of the following methods, select the action you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Aux Bus No Aux bus selection 1 to 48 b)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 c)
1 to 99 d)
1 to 399 e)
5 Src No Source signal selection 1 and upwards b)

a) As for the setting values, see “Selectable actions for various trigger types” (page 184)
b) When knob 2 selection is “Aux ? O’ride Src ??”
c) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
d) When knob 2 selection is “Snapshot”
e) When knob 2 selection is “Effect”

5 To confirm the setting in step 4, press [Action Set].


This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.

Selectable actions for various trigger types


• When the trigger type is other than “Level”
M/E-1 Cut, M/E-2 Cut, M/E-3 Cut, P/P Cut,
M/E-1 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Auto Trans,
P/P Auto Trans
M/E-1 Key1 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key1 Cut
M/E-1 Key2 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key2 Cut
M/E-1 Key3 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key3 Cut
M/E-1 Key4 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key4 Cut
M/E-2 Key1 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key1 Cut
M/E-2 Key2 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key2 Cut
M/E-2 Key3 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key3 Cut
M/E-2 Key4 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key4 Cut
M/E-3 Key1 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key1 Cut
M/E-3 Key2 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key2 Cut
M/E-3 Key3 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key3 Cut
M/E-3 Key4 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key4 Cut
P/P DSK1 Auto Trans, P/P DSK1 Cut
P/P DSK2 Auto Trans, P/P DSK2 Cut
P/P DSK3 Auto Trans, P/P DSK3 Cut

184 GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)


P/P DSK4 Auto Trans, P/P DSK4 Cut
FTB Auto Trans, FTB Cut
Master SS ? Recall,
SS ? Recall,
M/E-1 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E-1 Key2 SS ? Recall
M/E-1 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E-1 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E-2 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E-2 Key2 SS ? Recall
M/E-2 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E-2 Key4 SS ? Recall

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


M/E-3 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E-3 Key2 SS ? Recall
M/E-3 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E-3 Key4 SS ? Recall
P/P DSK1 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK2 SS ? Recall
P/P-1 DSK3 SS ? Recall, P/P-1 DSK4 SS ? Recall
FM Src1 Field Freeze, FM Src1 Frame Freeze, FM Src1 Freeze Off
FM Src2 Field Freeze, FM Src2 Frame Freeze, FM Src2 Freeze Off
FM Src1 Clip Record, FM Src1 Clip Stop, FM Src2 Clip Record, FM Src2
Clip Stop, FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup, FM1 to FM8 Clip Play, FM1 to FM8
Clip Stop,
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop,
Master Effect ? Recall
KF Rewind, Shotbox ? Recall, Macro Take, Macro ? Recall, No Action
• When the trigger type is only “Rising Edge” or “Falling Edge”
Aux? O’ride Src??
• When the trigger type is “Level”
Simul, Custom, Format (frame/field rate, number of lines)
(System Format, SWR Format, DME Ch1-Ch4 Format, DME Ch5-Ch8
Format)
Aspect (System Aspect, SWR Aspect, M/E-1 Aspect, M/E-2 Aspect,
M/E-3 Aspect, P/P Aspect, DME Ch1-Ch4 Aspect
DME Ch1 Aspect, DME Ch2 Aspect, DME Ch3 Aspect,
DME Ch4 Aspect, DME Ch5 Aspect
DME Ch6 Aspect, DME Ch7 Aspect, DME Ch8 Aspect)
Level Enable, No Action

Notes
• “Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the Aspect and Format actions that
can be used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used, if the
input is “Disable” then it is not possible to switch Aspect or Format by GPI
input.
If a GPI to switch Aspect or Format occurs when powering the system off,
the action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes
off and the power may go off before the action is completed. This may
corrupt the setup settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable
to avoid such a situation.
• As for “Aux ? O’ride Src ??,” when “Rising Edge” is selected, on a rising
edge the set AUX bus primary input is used. On a falling edge, the original

GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu) 185


state of the cross-point is restored. If the GPI trigger is applied repeatedly at
short intervals (0.5 second or less), the cross-point switching may not be
carried out correctly. In this case, apply the GPI trigger again.
• If “SWR Format” or “System Format” is selected for “Action” when the
format converter is used, you can set the conversion formats of the format
converter for “FC Input 1-8.”

Carrying out level settings


Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.

1 In the DCU >GPI Input Assign menu, select the action to be set, and press
[H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the settings.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Signal format/screen aspect ratio 1 and upwards
selection

3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level,
press [H Set]. To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low,
press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.

186 GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)


Parallel Output Settings (Output Config
Menu)

For the DCU parallel output ports, after carrying out tally settings in the
Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu, you can assign GPI outputs to output ports

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


that are still unused.
To assign DCU outputs to DCU parallel output ports, display the DCU >Output
Config menu.

To display the Output Config menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF3 ‘Output Config.’
The status area shows output port information.

Assigning a GPI Output Port


1 In the DCU >Output Config menu, select what the setting applies to
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 In the <Parallel Output Assign> group, press [GPI Output].

3 Using any of the following methods, select the output port and GPI output
number.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Parallel Output Slot Output port slot 2 to 6 a)
2 Parallel Output Port Output port 1 to 54 b)
5 GPI Output GPI output 1 to 50

a) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select 2.


b) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select a value in the range 1 to 36.

4 To confirm the selected setting, press [GPI Output Set].


This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.

Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu) 187


Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Output Port
1 In the DCU >Output Config menu, select what the setting applies to
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 In the <Parallel Output Assign> group, if [GPI Output] is on, press it to


turn it off.
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

3 Turn the knobs to select the slot and port to which the setting applies.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 From Slot First port slot 2 to 6
2 From Port First port number 1 to 54
3 To Slot Last port slot 2 to 6
4 To Port Last port number 1 to 54

4 In the <Parallel Output Assign> group, press [No Assign].

188 Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu)


GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign
Menu)

To set the trigger type and so on for each GPI output, display the DCU >GPI
Output Assign menu.

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


To display the GPI Output Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF4 ‘GPI Output
Assign.’
The GPI output port setting status appears in the status area.

Making DCU GPI Output Settings


1 In the DCU >GPI Output Assign menu, using any of the following
methods select what the setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No GPI output 1 to 50

2 In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.


(Rising Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open-
circuit or drives the output high, and holds this state for the
specified pulse width.
(Falling Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted
or drives the output low, and holds this state for the specified
pulse width.
(Any Edge): Each time the trigger occurs, the relay contacts are
alternately closed or opened, or the output is switched between
high and low.
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level.

3 Turning the knobs, select the pulse width and timing to be set.

GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu) 189


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 (fields)
4 Timing Output timing 1 to 3 a)

a) 1: Field 1, 2: Field 2, 3: Any

When “ ” is selected as the trigger polarity, there is no Pulse Width


setting. When “Status” is selected, there is no Pulse Width or Timing
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

setting.

4 In the <Source Device> group, select the control panel or DCU to handle
the GPI output.
SCU1: ID1 control panel (PNL1)
SCU2: ID2 control panel (PNL2)
SCU3: ID3 control panel (PNL3)
DCU1: ID1 DCU
DCU2: ID2 DCU

When the action set in the following step 5 is carried out on the control
panel selected here, this causes a GPI output. It is also possible to output
error information. When the DCU is selected, you can output error
information by means of the action set in step 5.

5 Using any of the following methods, select the action you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
5 Reg No Snapshot register number 1 to 4 b)
5 GPI No GPI number selection 1 to 32 c)

a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Status”


When Source Device is SCU: M/E1 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E1 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E1
Key3 SS ? Recall
M/E1 Key4 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E2
Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E3 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E3
Key4 SS ? Recall
P/P DSK1 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK2 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK3 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK4
SS ? Recall
Editor GPI-?? (executable only when the BZS-8050 license is valid)
No Action
When Source Device is DCU: No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Status”

190 GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu)


When Source Device is SCU: M/E1 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E1 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E1
Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E1 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E2 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E2
Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E3 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E3
Key4 SS ? Recall
P/P DSK1 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK2 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK3 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK4
SS ? Recall
M/E1 Key1 On, M/E1 Key2 On, M/E1 Key3 On, M/E1 Key4 On
M/E2 Key1 On, M/E2 Key2 On, M/E2 Key3 On, M/E2 Key4 On

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


M/E3 Key1 On, M/E3 Key2 On, M/E3 Key3 On, M/E3 Key4 On
P/P DSK1 On, P/P DSK2 On, P/P DSK3 On, P/P DSK4 On
Error Make, Error Break, Device Recording, No Action
When Source Device is DCU: Error Make, Error Break, No Action
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 2 selection is “GPI”

6 To confirm the selection, press [Action Set].


This confirms the selection, which appears in the status area.

Test firing the trigger


To test fire the trigger, in the DCU >GPI Output menu press [Test Fire].
This outputs a trigger from the selected output port. This is not output when the
trigger type is “Status.”

GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu) 191


Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign
Menu)

To set the protocol to match a device connected to a 9-pin serial port, display
the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu.
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

To display the Serial Port Assign menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF5 ‘Serial Port
Assign.’
The serial port setting status appears in the status area.

Making Serial Port Settings


1 In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the target for the setting
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the serial port.


• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)

a) The setting value range depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Using any of the following methods, select the protocol for the connected
device.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Device Type Protocol selection 1 to 7 a)

a) 1. No Assign: nothing is connected to the serial port.


2. P-Bus: P-Bus device.
3. VTR: VTR
4. DDR SD9P: disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol)
5. DDR VDCP: disk recorder (video disk communication protocol)

192 Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)


6. Extended VTR (Abekas A53 protocol)
7. Mixer ESAM-II

Note
Mixer ESAM-II cannot be operated from this system. It can only be
operated from an editing keyboard.

4 Press [Device Type Set].

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


The selected protocol is reflected on the left of the status area.

5 To enter the name of the serial port, press [Set] in the <Name> group.
A keyboard window appears. You can enter a name of not more than 16
characters.
If no name is set for the serial port, it is displayed as “DCUd_PORTs-p.”
d: 1 or 2 (DCU No.)
s: 2 to 6 (Slot No.)
p: 1 to 6 (Port No.)

6 Press [Enter].
To return the set name to the default name
Press [Clear] in the <Name> group.

7 From the <SCU Select> group, select the control panel (SCU1, SCU2 or
SCU3) assigned to operations on the external device connected to the
serial port.

Deleting the serial port assignment


1 In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the target for the setting
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 Using any of the following methods, specify the serial port.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Press [Clear].

Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) 193


Making Detailed Settings on the External Device
Connected to the Serial Port
After setting the external device for each serial port, it is necessary to make
further detailed settings for operation of the external device.

Making detailed settings for a P-Bus device


Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

1 In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the setting target (DCU1 or
DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
P-Bus device for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port number 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Press [Port Setting].


The DCU >Serial Port Assign >P-Bus Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, and SCU number appear. In the lower part of the status
area, the device name and response speed settings appear.

4 Using any of the following methods, select the ID for which you want to
make a device name setting.
• Press directly on the device name list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 ID ID selection 0 to 23

5 In the <Name> group, press [Set] to display a numeric keypad window.

6 Input the desired name, and press [Enter].


The input device name appears in the device name list.

194 Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)


To return the device name for the selected ID to the default name
In the <Name> group, press [Clear].

7 Using any of the following methods, specify the command to which the
response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the delay list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Command number selection 1 to 18

8 Turn the knob to set the response speed (in field units) of the device.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Delay Response speed setting 0 to 60

9 Press [Delay Set].


This confirms the setting.

10Repeat steps 4 to 9 as required to make the settings for other commands.


Making detailed settings for a VTR
1 In the <DCU Select> group of the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select
the target for the setting (DCU1 or DCU2).

2 Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
VTR for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Press [Port Setting].


The DCU >Serial Port Assign >VTR Setting menu appears.

Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) 195


At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, SCU number, and timecode source appear. In the lower
part of the status area, the VTR constants appear.

4 In the <TC Source> group, select the timecode source (reference signal for
determining the tape position) from the following.
LTC (Longitudinal Time Code): Use LTC. When interpolation data is
returned from a VTR, use that interpolation data.
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

LTC: VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code): Normally use LTC, but
when the tape is moving at speeds at which LTC cannot be read, use
VITC.
When interpolation data is returned from a VTR, use that interpolation
data.
VITC: Use VITC.
CTL (Control): CTL pulses or timer counter pulses are used. Use this
only for a tape on which no timecode is recorded.

The displayed tape position is based on the reference signal specified here.

5 Using any of the following methods, specify the VTR constants.


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item Item selection 1 to 16

6 Press [Set].
A numeric keypad window for hexadecimal input appears.

7 Set the VTR constants using values in the range 00 to FF.


Block Byte Setting item
BLOCK 1 1 HI-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)
2 LO-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)
3 HI-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL TIME)
4 LO-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL TIME)
5 EDIT DELAY (FRAME)
6 EE DELAY (FRAME)
7 OVER RUN (FRAME)
8 TRAJECTORY

196 Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)


Block Byte Setting item
BLOCK 2 1 TC READ DELAY (FRAME)
2 START DELAY (FRAME)
3 AFTER SYNC DELAY–
4 AFTER SYNC DELAY+
5 MODE1
6 MODE2

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


7 MAX PRRL SPEED
8 QUICK PVW PRRL TIME (FRAME)

8 Press [Enter].
This confirms the settings.

9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 as required to set the constants for other VTRs.

Making detailed settings for a disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin


protocol)
1 In the <DCU Select> group of the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select
the target for the setting (DCU1 or DCU2).

2 Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
disk recorder for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Press [Port Setting].


The DCU >Serial Port Assign >DDR SD9P Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, SCU number, and disk recorder type appear. In the lower
part of the status area, the response speed settings appear.

4 Using any of the following methods, specify the item to which the
response speed setting applies.

Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) 197


• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item No Item selection 1 to 4 a)

a) 1. Maximum Open Delay: maximum time required to open a file


2. Maximum Cueup Delay: maximum time required to cue up a file
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

3. Play After Cueup Delay: delay time from the cued-up state to begin playback
4. Play After Open Next Delay: delay time from the Open Next state to begin playback

5 Turn the knob to set the disk recorder response speed.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Setting Response speed setting 0 to 255

6 Press [Set].
This confirms the setting.

7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 as required to make the settings for other items.

Making detailed settings for a disk recorder (video disk


communications protocol)
1 In the <DCU Select> group of the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select
the target for the setting (DCU1 or DCU2).

2 Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
disk recorder for which you want to make settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Press [Port Setting].


The DCU >Serial Port Assign >DDR VDCP Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, SCU number, and disk recorder type appear.

198 Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)


In the lower part of the status area appear the video port number and
response speed settings.

4 In the <DDR Type> group, select the type of disk recorder.


Player: Functioning as a player.
Recorder: Functioning as a recorder.

5 In the <Name Mode> group, select the file name character count mode.

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


Fixed 8 Character: Use 8-character file names.
Variable Length: Use variable-length file names. (The file name is
limited to 23 characters.)

6 In the <TC Sense> group, select the type of timecode sensing.


Zero based: Mode in which timecode is detected taking the first frame of
the recalled file as 00:00:00:00
SOM based: Mode in which timecode saved in the recalled file is detected

Note
The details of the above operation modes depend on the connected device.
For more information, consult the documentation for the connected device.

7 Using any of the following methods, specify the item to which the video
port number or response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item No Item selection 1 to 7 a)

a) 1. Video Port: Number of the video port associated with the serial port to which the setting
applies
For a player, the output port setting
For a recorder, the input port setting
2. Maximum Open Delay: maximum time required to open a file
3. Maximum Cueup Delay: maximum time required to cue up a file
4. Play After Cueup Delay: delay time from the cued-up state to begin playback
5. Stop Delay: delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping
6. Still Delay: delay time from issuing the still command until actually stopping
7. Continue Delay: delay time from issuing the continue command until actually stopping

8 Turn the knob to set the disk recorder video port number or response speed.

Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) 199


When setting the video port number

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Setting Video port number 0 to 127 a)

a) 0: No assignment

When setting the response speed


Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Setting Response speed 0 to 255

9 Press [Set].
This confirms the setting.

10If required, repeat steps 4 to 9, to set other items.


Making detailed settings for an Extended VTR
1 In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the setting target (DCU1 or
DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
Extended VTR for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port number 1 and upwards a)

a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)

3 Press [Port Setting].


The DCU >Serial Port Assign >Extended VTR Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, and SCU number appear. In the lower part of the status
area, the response speed settings appear.

4 Using any of the following methods, specify the command to which the
response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

200 Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)


• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item No Item selection 1 to 4 a)

a) 1.Maximum Open Delay: maximum time required to open a file


2. Maximum Cueup Delay: maximum time required to cue up a file
3. Play After Cueup Delay: maximum delay time from the cued-up state to begin playback
4. Stop Delay: delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping

Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)


5 Turn the knob to set the response speed of the Extended VTR.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Setting Response speed setting 0 to 255

6 Press [Set].
This confirms the setting.

7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 as required to make the settings for other items.

Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) 201


Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)

202 Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)


Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router
Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)
Router Interface Settings (Router Menu) ..............................................204
Assigning Switcher Inputs and Outputs to S-Bus Space ...................204
Making an External Box Setting .......................................................205
Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu) ............................................208
Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu) ..............................................................209
Making New Wiring Settings ............................................................209
Changing the Wiring Settings ...........................................................210
Deleting Wiring Settings ...................................................................210
Sorting Wiring Settings .....................................................................210
Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu) ....................................212
Making New Tally Generation Settings ............................................212
Modifying Tally Generation ..............................................................213
Deleting Tally Generation Settings ...................................................213
Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu) .................................................215
Making New Tally Copy Settings .....................................................215
Modifying Tally Copy Settings .........................................................216
Deleting Tally Copy Settings ............................................................216
Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu) ........................................217
Making or Modifying Parallel Tally Settings ....................................217
Deleting Parallel Tally Settings .........................................................218
Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu) ...............................................219
Setting or Changing the Serial Tally Settings ...................................219
Making the Serial Tally Source Address Settings .............................219
Clearing a Source Address Setting ....................................................220
Router Interface Settings (Router Menu)

In this system, the interface with a router (routing switcher) uses the S-Bus
protocol. It is therefore necessary to assign inputs and outputs of the switcher
and so on to an S-Bus space.
To carry out this assignment, use the Router/Tally >Router menu. The
assignment is common to the parallel and serial tallies.

To display the Router menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF1 ‘Router.’
The status area shows the device names to be assigned to the S-Bus space, the
matrix size, source address, destination address, and level.

The following functions are available here.


Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

• Matrix Size: Assign the switcher matrix of each switcher processor to S-Bus
space, and select the matrix size and positioning level, source address
settings, and so on.
• External Box: To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with
a parallel input, assign a matrix as an external selector in the S-Bus space.
Make the matrix size, assignment level, source address, and other settings.
• Alias Name Gp: Set the group number for an S-Bus description name to be
displayed in the source name displays for a cross-point operation.

Assigning Switcher Inputs and Outputs to S-Bus Space


1 In the <Device> group of the Router/Tally >Router menu, select the device
to which the settings apply.
SWR1: Settings apply to switcher 1.
SWR2: Settings apply to switcher 2.

Note
When there are two switchers on the same network, the SWR2 (second
switcher) settings are required. If there is only one switcher, the settings
are not required.

2 In the <Matrix Size> group, select the matrix size.


Standard (136 × 138): Assign the switcher S-Bus space at full size. You
can assign all switcher inputs and outputs to the S-Bus space, but this
causes some waste of S-Bus space.

204 Router Interface Settings (Router Menu)


Compact (128 × 128): Assign the switcher S-Bus space at compact size.
It is not possible to assign all switcher inputs and outputs to the S-Bus
space, but the S-Bus space can be used efficiently.

3 Turn the knobs to set the parameters for the following items.
Source: Specify the start address of the matrix source.
Destination: Specify the start address of the matrix destination.
Level: Specify the level in the S-Bus space.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Source Source start address 1 and upwards a)
2 Destination Destination start address 1 and upwards b)
3 Level Level 1 to 8

a) When the matrix size is Standard, the maximum value is 889. For the Compact size, the
maximum value is 897.

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)


b) When the matrix size is Standard, the maximum value is 887. For the Compact size, the
maximum value is 897.

Making an External Box Setting


1 In the Router/Tally >Router menu, press [External Box Assign].
The External Box Assign menu appears.
The status area shows the external box size, address, and other settings.

2 In the <Device> group, select what the setting applies to (External Box 1
to 4).

3 In the <Matrix Size> group, select the number of inputs.


No Assign: Do not use.
8×1: Select an external box with 8 inputs and 1 output.
16×1: Select an external box with 16 inputs and 1 output.
32×1: Select an external box with 32 inputs and 1 output.

4 Turn the knobs to make adjustments.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Source Source start address 1 to 1017 a)
1 to 1009 b)
1 to 993 c)
2 Destination Destination start address 1 to 1024
3 Level Level 1 to 8

Router Interface Settings (Router Menu) 205


a) When Matrix Size is 8×1
b) When Matrix Size is 16×1
c) When Matrix Size is 32×1

Coupling external boxes


By coupling a number of external boxes, the number of inputs can be increased.
Here the example of coupling External Box1 and External Box2 is described.

1 In the Router/Tally >Router >External Box Assign menu, select [External


box1] from the <Device> group.

2 In the <Matrix Size> group, select [8×1].

3 Turn the knobs to make adjustments.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

1 Source Source start address 1 to 1017


2 Destination Destination start address 1 to 1024
3 Level Level 1 to 8

4 In the <Device> group, select [External box2].

5 In the <Matrix Size> group, select [32×1].

6 Turn the knobs to make adjustments.


At this point make the settings of Destination and Level the same as in step
3.
This automatically couples External Box1 and External Box2, forming an
external box with 40 (8+32) inputs.

Setting the group number of an S-Bus description name


1 In the <Alias Name Gp> group of the Router/Tally >Router menu, press
[Gp No].

2 Turn the knob to set the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Gp No Group number of S-Bus 0 to 7 a)
description name

a) When setting values 1 to 7 are selected: If the name is not set, the description name for 0
appears. If the description name for 0 is not registered either, the Type and No values
appear.

206 Router Interface Settings (Router Menu)


3 In the <Alias Name Gp> group, press [Set].
This confirms the setting, which is reflected in the status area.

Note
Transmit the description name selected here from the router.

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

Router Interface Settings (Router Menu) 207


Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu)

With the S-Bus protocol, tally control is possible for groups 1 to 8, but in this
system you can use either groups 1 to 4 or groups 5 to 8.
You can also select whether or not to transfer the tally information over the S-
Bus.
To select the tally groups, use the Router/Tally >Group Tally menu.

To display the Group Tally menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF2 ‘Group
Tally.’

The following functions are available here.


• Tally Group: Select the group tally (Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8) which can be
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

used. (For the parallel tally, all groups can be used regardless of this setting.)
• S-Bus Tally Enable: Specify S-Bus tally enabled or disabled.

Setting the tally groups


1 To select a consecutive sequence of groups from each of groups 1 to 4 and
groups 5 to 8, set [All Group Enable] to On in the Group Tally menu.

2 In the <Tally Group> group, select the desired groups.

208 Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu)


Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu)

When configuring a system in which the switcher inputs and outputs are
connected to a router, setting this connection configuration (referred to as
"wiring") in the S-Bus space, or inputting the information which specifies the
physical wiring, is necessary.
To make the wiring settings, use the Router/Tally >Wiring menu. The settings
are common to the parallel and serial tallies.

To display the Wiring menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF3 ‘Wiring.’
The status area shows the wiring settings.

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)


Making New Wiring Settings
1 In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, press [New].
The New menu appears.

2 With a knob or menu operation, set the destination.


When switcher inputs and outputs are connected to the router in a group,
you can specify the start and end destination addresses.

Destination From: Specify the start destination address for the wiring
configuration.
Destination To: When the wiring configuration is multiple, specify the
end destination address. For a single wiring connection, this setting is
not required.
Destination Level: Specify the destination level of the wiring
configuration.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Destination (From) Destination start address 1 to 1024
2 Destination (To) Destination end address From start address to
1024
3 Destination (Level) Destination level 1 to 8

3 Set the source.


Source From: Specify the source start address for the wiring
configuration.

Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu) 209


Source Level: Specify the source level for the wiring configuration.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


4 Source (From) Source start address 1 to 1024
5 Source (Level) Source level 1 to 8

4 Press [Execute].
This makes the wiring setting according to the specifications in steps 2 and
3.

Changing the Wiring Settings


1 In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, press [Modify].
The Modify menu appears.
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

2 Referring to steps 2 and 3 in the preceding section “Making new wiring


settings,” change the parameters as required. In this case, however, it is not
possible to specify multiple destinations in a single operation, and a single
“Destination Address” must be specified.

3 Press [Execute].
This updates the wiring settings.

Deleting Wiring Settings


1 In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, using either of the following methods,
select the wiring whose settings you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

2 Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected wiring entry.

Sorting Wiring Settings


In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, press [Sort].
The sorting of wiring settings are executed in the following order.

210 Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu)


Destination level order (ascending)tDestination address order
(ascending)tSource level order (ascending)

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu) 211


Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable
Menu)

For settings relating to tally generation, use the Router/Tally >Tally Enable
menu.
Specify the destination to be the reference for tally generation, and make
various settings.
The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies.

To display the Tally Enable menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF4 ‘Tally
Enable.’
The status area shows the tally generation settings.
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

The following functions are available here.


• Tally Type: Specify the tally type.
• Destination: Specify the address and level.
• Tally Enable: Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled.
– Enable: Always enabled.
– Disable: Always disabled.
– Tally Input: Follow the tally input status.

Making New Tally Generation Settings


1 In the Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu, press [New].
The New menu appears.

2 Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Destination Address Destination address 1 to 1024
2 Destination Level Destination level 1 to 8
3 Tally Type Tally type 1 to 16 a)

a) 1:R1, 2:G1, 3:R2, 4:G2, 5:R3, 6:G3, 7:R4, 8:G4, 9:R5, 10:G5, 11:R6, 12:G6, 13:R7,
14:G7, 15:R8, and 16:G8. (R is an abbreviation of “Red Tally,” and G of “Green Tally.”)

3 In the <Tally Enable> group, specify the tally generation mode.

212 Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu)


Enable: Always generate a tally.
Disable: Never generate a tally.
Tally Input: Generate a tally from the tally input state.

4 When you selected Tally Input as the tally generation mode in step 3,
select either of the following in the <Tally Input> group.
DCU1: Generate tally with reference to signal input to DCU1 port. Set the
port number with the knob.
DCU2: Generate tally with reference to signal input to DCU2 port. Set the
port number with the knob.

5 Turn the knob to select the tally input port number.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


5 Input No Tally input port number 1 to 102

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)


6 Press [Execute].
This sets the settings made in steps 2 to 5 as the settings for tally
generation.

Modifying Tally Generation


1 In the Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu, press [Modify].
The Modify menu appears.

2 With reference to steps 2 to 5 in the preceding section “Making new tally


generation settings,” change the parameters as required.

3 Press [Execute].
This modifies the tally generation settings.

Deleting Tally Generation Settings


1 Using either of the following methods in the Router/Tally >Tally Enable
menu, select the tally generation entry you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.

Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu) 213


2 Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected tally generation entry.
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

214 Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu)


Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu)

You can copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a


different source.
For settings relating to the tally copy function, use the Router/Tally >Tally
Copy menu. The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies.

To display the Tally Copy menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF5 ‘Tally
Copy.’
The status area shows the tally copy status.

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)


Making New Tally Copy Settings
1 In the Router/Tally >Tally Copy menu, select [New].
The New menu appears.

2 Turn the knob to select the copy-from source.


When setting more than one tally copy, you can specify the copy-from
source start and end addresses.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Copy From (From) Copy-from source start address 1 to 1024
2 Copy From (To) Copy-from source end address 1 to 1024

3 Specify the copy-to source address.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Copy To (From) Copy-to source (start) address 1 to 1024
4 Copy To (To) Copy-to source (end) address 1 to 1024

4 Press [Execute].
This makes the tally copy setting according to the specifications in steps 2
and 3.

Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu) 215


Modifying Tally Copy Settings
1 In the Router/Tally >Tally Copy menu, press [Modify].
The Modify menu appears.

2 Use the knobs to select the copy source and copy destination.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Copy From Copy-from source 1 to 1024
2 Copy To Copy-to source 1 to 1024

3 Press [Execute].
This updates the tally copy settings.
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

Deleting Tally Copy Settings


1 In the Router/Tally >Tally Copy menu, using any of the following
methods, select the tally copy whose settings you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Copy No Tally copy setting selection for deletion 1 and upwards

2 Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected tally copy entry.

216 Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu)


Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu)

For settings relating to parallel tally, use the Router/Tally >Parallel Tally
menu.
Make the parallel port settings for output of tally information pertaining to
sources and destinations.
For each of the tally output terminal numbers, specify the tally type, and source
address or destination level and address.

To display the Parallel Tally menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF6 ‘Parallel
Tally.’
The status area shows the parallel tally settings.

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)


Making or Modifying Parallel Tally Settings
1 In the <Device> group of the Router/Tally >Parallel Tally menu, select
DCU1 or DCU2.

2 Using any of the following methods, select the slot number and port
number.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Slot No Parallel tally slot number 2 to 6 a)
2 Port No Parallel tally port number 1 to 54 b)

a) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 36 for
the port.
b) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select a value in the range 1 to 36.

3 Press [Set].
The Set menu appears.

4 In the <Source/Destination> group, select the tally type.


Src: Return a tally to all sources output to the destination.

Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu) 217


Dest: Return a tally to the destination outputting the source to which a
source tally is returned.

5 Set the destination address and level.


The level setting is only required when in step 4 you selected Destination.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


1 Address Destination address 1 to 1024
2 Level Destination level 1 to 8

6 When setting the tally type, set the following parameter.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


3 Type Tally type 1 to 16 a)

a) 1:R1, 2:G1, 3:R2, 4:G2, 5:R3, 6:G3, 7:R4, 8:G4, 9:R5, 10:G5, 11:R6, 12:G6, 13:R7,
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

14:G7, 15:R8, and 16:G8. (R is an abbreviation of “Red Tally,” and G of “Green Tally.”)

7 Press [Execute].
This makes the parallel tally settings, in accordance with the settings in
steps 1 to 6.

Deleting Parallel Tally Settings


1 In the Router/Tally >Parallel Tally menu, using any of the following
methods, select the parallel tally whose settings you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Slot No Parallel tally slot number 2 to 6
2 Port No Parallel tally port number 1 to 54

2 Press [Clear].
This deletes the selected parallel tally entry.

218 Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu)


Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu)

To make serial tally settings, display the Router/Tally >Serial Tally menu.
Make the serial tally settings, including tally type and source address for each
serial tally port.

To display the Serial Tally menu


In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF7 ‘Serial
Tally.’
The serial tally settings appear in the status area.

Setting or Changing the Serial Tally Settings

Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)


1 In the <Serial Tally Port> group of the Router/Tally >Serial Tally menu,
select the port to which the setting applies.

2 In the <Tally Group> group, select the tally group.

3 In the <Tally Type> group, press the tally types to select. (You can select
up to four.)

Note
The selectable tally types depend on the settings in step 2.

Making the Serial Tally Source Address Settings


To set the serial tally source address for each port, use the following procedure.

1 In the Router/Tally >Serial Tally menu, press [Source Assign].


The Source Assign menu appears.
In the status area, the tally types and source address set for the serial tally
port appear.

2 In the <Serial Tally Port> group, select the port to which the setting
applies.

3 Using any of the following methods, select the port bit number.

Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu) 219


• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bit No Bit selection 1 to 128

4 Turn the knob to select the source address.

Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values


2 Source Addr Source address selection 1 to 1024

5 Press [Source Address Set].


This confirms the setting.
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)

Clearing a Source Address Setting


To clear a source address setting for a particular bit
In the Router/Tally >Serial Tally >Source Assign menu, select the serial tally
port and bit number (see steps 2 and 3 in the previous item), then press [Clear].
This clears the source address setting for the selected bit.

To clear all source address settings


In the Router/Tally >Serial Tally >Source Assign menu, select the serial tally
port, then press [All Clear].
A confirmation message appears.
• If you select “Yes,” this clears all source address settings for the selected
serial tally port.
• If you select “No,” the clear operation is canceled.

220 Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu)


Chapter 24 Simple Connection of
the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus
Remote Panel
Procedure for Simple Connection ...........................................................222
Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in Simple Connection ................224
Procedure for Simple Connection

To connect the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to a CCP-9000


Center Control Panel using an S-Bus data link requires a BKPF-R70A Routing
Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for
connection.
Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel

However, using a simple connection, the need for an S-Bus data link primary
station is avoided, and direct connection to the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.
A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met:
• There are no devices other than the CCP-9000 and MKS-8080/8082
connected on the S-Bus data link.
• There are no more than 16 MKS-8080/8082 units connected on the S-Bus
data link.

To carry out simple connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote


Panel, use the following procedure.
For settings on the MKS-8080/8082, see the section “Making the Setting With
Buttons (Setup Function)” in the Operation Manual for the MKS-8080/8082.

1 Carry out initialization of the MKS-8080/8082 settings.


This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082 separately.

2 Set the MKS-8080/8082 station number in the range 2 to 17.


This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082 separately.

3 Set the S-Bus data link primary station to the CCP-9000/9000A Center
Control Panel by setting the STATION ID switches S903 on the front of
the board in the SCU SLOT 1 to 001 (switch 1 only to the OPEN position).

System control unit Board STATION ID switches


MKS-9011/9012 CA-52 S903
MKS-9011A/9012A FP-141 S108

4 In the Engineering Setup >System >Initialize menu, select PNL, and carry
out a reset.
This carries out a restart, and when the restart is completed connection to
the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.

5 In the Engineering Setup >Router/Tally > Router menu, set the position of
the MVS-6000 system in S-Bus space.

222 Procedure for Simple Connection


Select the setting from SWR1 and SWR2, and set each of Source,
Destination, and Level to 1.

Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel

Procedure for Simple Connection 223


Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in
Simple Connection

As a result of making the simple connection, the MKS-8080/8082 operates in


AUX bus mode, and the settings are the following factory defaults.
Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel

With regard to the meaning of the following settings, see the section “Menu
Operations” in the Operation Manual for the MKS-8080/8082.

C: SET SWITCHER ID (for AUX mode)


This is set to 001, which is the station number of the CCP-9000/9000A.

D: SET AUX DESTINATION/SOURCE (for AUX mode)


The source is set to IN001 and following, and destination is set to OUT001 and
following.

H: SET PHANTOM TABLE (for Router mode)


This is unset, since the unit does not operate in router mode.

N: SET PANEL TABLE (for Router mode)


The source is set to IN001 and following, and destination is set to OUT001 and
following. However, since the unit does not operate in router mode, these
settings are not used.

R: SET ROUTE
Since when using the simple connection the switcher and router cannot be
connected in cascade, no route setting is required, and this is unset.

O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION


Set the source and destination ranges so that the MVS-6000 inputs and outputs
can be selected.

Y: SET DISPLAY MODES


The DISPLAY MODES/PANEL FUNCTION setting is set to NORMAL. The
TALLY GROUP setting is set to be the same as the setting in Engineering
Setup >Router/Tally >Tally Group on the MVS-6000.

Z: SET PANEL STATUS


The various settings are the same as the factory default settings.

224 Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in Simple Connection


Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS
Checking the Communications Status ....................................................226
Communications Status Display .......................................................226
Checking the Communications Status

In the Diagnosis menu, you can check the communications status of the control
LAN and data LAN within the system.

Communications Status Display


To display the communications status, in the Diagnosis menu select VF3
‘System Info’ and HF1 ‘LAN Status’.
The following communications status screen appears.
Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS

Devices constituting the system only appear if they are connected.


You can check connection information in the Engineering Setup >System
>System Config menu (See “System Settings (System Config Menu)” (page
15)).
Even if a DCU is connected, if there is a communications error, it does not
appear.

The LAN communications status is shown as follows.


• Control LAN (CTRL LAN)
When connected: White
When not connected: Red and white flashing
• Data LAN (DATA LAN)
When connected: Blue

226 Checking the Communications Status


When not connected: Red and blue flashing
• Peripheral LAN (PERIPH LAN)
When connected: Amber
When not connected: Not shown

If the connection between the menu panel and another panel is broken, it does
not appear.

Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS

Checking the Communications Status 227


Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS

228 Checking the Communications Status


Appendix (Volume 3)
Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define] .....................230
Data Saved by [Setup Define] ...........................................................231
Data Saved by [Initial Status Define] ................................................236
Error Messages .........................................................................................239
Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status/Error Log Menu .......239
Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box ...................................244
Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu ....................256
Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial
Status Define]

This section lists the data saved in the Engineering Setup >System >Start Up
menu, by each of [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define].
Appendix (Volume 3)

230 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]


Data Saved by [Setup Define]

Type Menu number Menu path Saved data


Included in 0022 Home >Favorites >Group Edit All data relating to Group Edit
Panel Setup menu
0023 Home >Favorites >Button Edit All data relating to Button Edit
menu
7321 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Config menu
>Config
7321.1 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to DSK Fader
>Config >DSK Fader Assign Assign menu
7321.2 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Key Trans Link
>Config >Link/Program Button menu
>Key Trans Link
7321.3 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to External Bus
>Config >Link/Program Button Link menu
>External Bus Link
7321.7 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to 10 Key Region
>Config >10 Key Region Assign Assign menu
7321.8 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Link/Program
>Config >Link/Program Button Button menu
7321.15 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Compact Key
>Config >Compact Key Module Module Assign menu
Assign
7321.18 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to M/E Operation

Appendix (Volume 3)
>Config >M/E Operation Inhibit Inhibit menu
7322.1 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt All data relating to Table Button
Assign >Table Button Assign Assign menu
7322.5 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt <Xpt Shift Mode> And <Display
Assign >Main,V/K Pair Assign Shift Mode> Group Data
7322.10 Engineering Setup >Panel >Side All data relating to Side Flags
Flags Button Assign Button Assign menu
7323 Engineering Setup >Panel >Aux Data relating to bus assignment to
Assign AUX delegation buttons
7323.1 Engineering Setup >Panel >Aux All data relating to RTR Mode
Assign >RTR Mode Setting Setting menu
7324 Engineering Setup >Panel >Prefs/ All data relating to function
Utility assignment to user preference
buttons

Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define] 231


Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in 7324.1 Engineering Setup >Panel >Prefs/ All data relating to function
Panel Setup Utility >Utility Module Assign assignment to utility/shotbox
control block
7324.2 Engineering Setup >Panel >Prefs/ All data relating to utility/shotbox
Utility >Key 2/4 Bus Button Assign assignment to cross-point buttons
in the key 2 row
7325 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Device
>Device Interface Interface menu
7325.1 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to GPI Input
>Device Interface >GPI Input menu
7325.3 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to GPI Output
>Device Interface >GPI Output menu
7325.4 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to DCU Serial
>Device Interface >DCU Serial Port Assign menu
Port Assign
7326 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Operation
>Operation menu
7326.2 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Effect Mode
>Operation >Effect Mode menu (excluding [Default KF
Duration] setting values)
7326.3 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Flexi Pad Mode
>Operation >Flexi Pad Mode menu
7326.4 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Custom Button
>Operation >Custom Button menu
7326.5 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Sensitivity
>Operation >Sensitivity menu
Appendix (Volume 3)

7326.6 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to Macro menu


>Operation >Macro
7326.7 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to CCP-6000/
>Operation>Custom Button 8000 Button menu
>CCP-6000/8000 Button
7326.8 Engineering Setup >Panel All data relating to CCP-9000
>Operation >Custom Button Button menu
>CCP-9000 Button
7327 Engineering Setup >Panel • Setting data for the following
>Maintenance buttons:
- [Screen Saver]
- [LCD Brightness]
- [LED Brightness]
- [Switch Brightness]
- [Touch Beep]
• Setting data for Initial Menu
7351 to 7355 Engineering Setup >DCU All data relating to DCU
7361 to 7367 Engineering Setup >Router/Tally All data relating to router interface
and tally interface
— — Data of Color Palette window

232 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]


Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in 7331 • Engineering Setup >Switcher • <M/E Config> group setting
Switcher 7331.1 >Config data
Setup 7331.2 • Engineering Setup >Switcher • All data relating to M/E Output
7331.3 >Config >M/E Output Assign Assign menu
• Engineering Setup >Switcher • All data relating to PGM Config
>Config >PGM Config menu
• Engineering Setup >Switcher • All data relating to K-PVW
>Config >K-PVW Config Config menu
7331.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to User1-8 Config
>Config >User1-8 Config menu
7331.5 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Logical M/E
>Config >Logical M/E Assign Assign menu
7331.6 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to DME Config
>Config >DME Config menu
7331 Engineering Setup >Switcher Setting data for knob 3 (Phase)
>Config
7331 Engineering Setup >Switcher Setting data for <Switching
>Config Timing> group
7331 Engineering Setup >Switcher Settings of the following items:
>Config > • [Recall M/E Config]
• [DME Wipe Sub Inhibit]
7331.7 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Side Flags
>Config >Side Flags menu
7332 Engineering Setup >Switcher Settings of [Input Phase Adj],
>Input [Through Mode] and [Matte Illeg
Col Limit]
7332.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Video Process

Appendix (Volume 3)
>Input >Video Process menu
7333 Engineering Setup >Switcher Settings of the following reference
>Output outputs:
• Knob 1 (Output No)
• Knob 2 (Line)
• Knob 3 (Time)
7333.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher > All data relating to Output Assign
Output >Output Assign menu
7333.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Video Clip
>Output >Video Clip menu
7333.3 Engineering Setup >Switcher Setting of [V Blank Mask], and
>Output >V Blank/Through [Through Mode] setting data for
each output
7333.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Safe Title
>Output >Safe Title menu
7333.5 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to 4:3 Crop menu
>Output >4:3 Crop
7333.7 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to FC Output
>Output >FC Output Assign Assign

Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define] 233


Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in 7334 Engineering Setup >Switcher Following setting data in the
Switcher >Transition Transition menu:
Setup • <Transition Preview> group
• <Key Transition> group
• [Bus Toggle], [Split Fader]
• <FTB> group
7334.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Preset Color
>Transition >Preset Color Mix Mix menu
7334.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher > Setting data for <Fader Curve>
Transition >Transition Curve group
7335 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Key/Wipe/FM/
>Key/Wipe/FM CCR menu
7335.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Show Key
>Key/Wipe/FM/CCR >Show Key menu
7335.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Key Auto Drop
>Key/Wipe/FM/CCR >Key Auto menu
Drop
7336.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Internal Bus
>Link >Internal Bus Link Link menu
7336.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to GPI Link menu
>Link >GPI Link
7336.6 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to M/E Link menu
>Link >M/E Link
7336.7 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Key Transition
>Link >Key Transition Link Link menu
7337.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to Remote Assign
Appendix (Volume 3)

>Device Interface >Remote menu


Assign
7337.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to GPI Input
>Device Interface >GPI Input menu
7337.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to GPI Output
>Device Interface >GPI Output menu
7337.5 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to AUX Control
>Device Interface >AUX Control menu
7337.6 Engineering Setup >Switcher All data relating to DME Type
>Device Interface >DME Type Setting menu a)
Setting
7322.5 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt Cross-point assignment settings
Assign >Main,V/K Pair Assign (excluding <Xpt Shift Mode> and
<Display Shift Mode> groups)
7322.6 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt • Names of source signals
Assign >Src Name/LCD Color • Color of source name display
for each source signal
7326.2 Engineering Setup >Panel Setting of [Default KF Duration]
>Operation >Effect Mode for switcher keyframes
3221 Misc >Safe Title All data relating to Safe Title
menu

234 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]


Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in 7341 Engineering Setup >DME >Input All data relating to Input menu
DME Setup 7341.1 Engineering Setup >DME >Input All data relating to TBC Center
>TBC Center menu b)
7343 Engineering Setup >DME Video clip level adjustment values
>Output for DME1 and DME2 outputs b)
7343.1 Engineering Setup >DME All data relating to Monitor Output
>Output >Monitor Output menu a)
7344 Engineering Setup >DME All data relating to Device
>Device Interface Interface menu
7344.1 Engineering Setup >DME All data relating to DME1 GPI
>Device Interface >DME1 GPI Input menu
Input
7344.3 Engineering Setup >DME All settings relating to DME1 GPI
>Device Interface >DME1 GPI Output menu
Output
7344.4 Engineering Setup >DME All settings relating to DME2 GPI
>Device Interface >DME2 GPI Input menu
Input
7344.6 Engineering Setup >DME All settings relating to DME2 GPI
>Device Interface >DME2 GPI Output menu
Output
7326.2 Engineering Setup >Panel • Settings relating to [Default KF
>Operation >Effect Mode Duration] for DME keyframes
• Setting data for [Effect Auto
Save] button

Appendix (Volume 3)
a) For MVE-9000 only
b) Only when using the MVE-8000A/9000 SDI interface

Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define] 235


Data Saved by [Initial Status Define]

Type Menu number Menu path Saved data


Included in — — Setting data and LCD displays for the
Panel following panel buttons
• Key Control Block:
Delegation buttons, [AUTO DELEG]
• Numeric Keypad Control Block:
Mode selection buttons, [TC], [RCALL],
[STORE]
• Menu Control Block:
User preference buttons assigned for
Plug-in Editor Enbl and System
Manager Enbl functions
• [SUB MENU SITE]
• Utility/Shotbox Control Block:
[BANK1] to [BANK4], memory recall
button
• Downstream Key Control Block:
[DSK1] to [DSK4], [K-SS], key source
name display/key snapshot buttons
• CCP-9000:
AUX delegation buttons, bank selection
buttons, mode selection buttons, [EDIT
ENBL], key row delegation buttons
3211 Misc >Enable >Port All data relating to System Manager
Enable >System Manager menu
3212 Misc >Enable >Plug-In All data relating to Plug-In Editor menu
Appendix (Volume 3)

Editor
6351 Snapshot >Key Snapshot Settings of <Recall Mode> group
>Attribute
Included in — — • For each M/E, setting data relating to
Switcher the following:
(Same as cross-points, transitions, Key1 to Key4
data saved in (including settings in the independent
Snapshots) a) key transition control block), wipes,
DME wipes, video processing
• Color backgrounds 1/2
• Frame memory
• AUX bus (including video processing
settings)
• Monitor bus
3213 Misc >Enable >Side Flags All data relating to Side Flags menu
3211 Misc >Enable >Port Setting data for <Switcher> group
Enable

236 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]


Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in 4100 DME >Status Three-dimensional transformation data
DME
4111 DME >Edge >Border/ All data relating to Border/Crop menu
Crop
4112 DME >Edge >Beveled All data relating to Beveled Edge menu
Edge
4121 to 4124 DME >Video Modify All data relating to Video Modify menu
4131 DME >Freeze >Freeze All data relating to Freeze menu
4141 (4141.1 DME >Non Linear All data relating to Non Linear menu
to 4141.28)
4151 DME >Light/Trail >Lighting All data relating to Lighting menu
4152 DME >Light/Trail >Trail All data relating to Trail menu
4153 DME >Light/Trail >Motion All data relating to Motion Decay menu
Decay
4154 DME >Light/Trail >KF All data relating to KF Strobe menu
Strobe
4161 DME >Input/Output All data relating to Bkgd menu
>Bkgd
4162 DME >Input/Output All data relating to Video/Key menu
>Video/Key
4163 DME >Input/Output All data relating to Process menu
>Process
4164 DME >Input/Output All data relating to Graphic menu
>Graphic

Appendix (Volume 3)
4211, 4221 Global Effect >Ch1-Ch4 All data relating to Combine Priority menu
>Combine Priority
Global Effect >Ch5-Ch8
>Combine Priority
4212, 4222 Global Effect >Ch1-Ch4 All data relating to Brick menu
>Brick
Global Effect >Ch5-Ch8
>Brick
4213, 4223 Global Effect >Ch1-Ch4 All data relating to Shadow menu
>Shadow
Global Effect >Ch5-Ch8
>Shadow
4113 DME >Edge >Key Border All data relating to Key Border menu b)
4114 DME > Edge> Art Edge All data relating to Art Edge menu b)
4115 DME >Edge >Drop/Flex All data relating to Drop/Flex Shadow
Shadow menu b)
4116 DME >Edge >Wipe Crop All data relating to Wipe Crop menu b)
4117 DME >Edge >Color Mix All data relating to Color Mix menu b)
4127 DME >Video Modify All data relating to Mask menu b)
>Mask

Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define] 237


Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in 4156 DME >Light/Trail >Spot All data relating to Spot Lighting menu b)
DME Lighting
4155 DME >Light/Trail >Wind All data relating to Wind menu b)
4171 DME >Enhanced Video All data relating to Sketch menu b)
Modify >Sketch
4172 DME >Enhanced Video All data relating to Metal menu b)
Modify >Metal
4173 DME >Enhanced Video All data relating to Dim & Fade menu a)
Modify >Dim & Fade
4174 DME >Enhanced Video All data relating to Glow menu b)
Modify >Glow
3211 Misc >Enable >Port <DME1> and <DME2> group data
Enable

a) In Multi Program 2 mode, M/E Config settings are saved in a snapshot when [Recall M/E
Config] is set to ON, but are not saved by [Initial Status Define].
b) For MVE-9000 only
Appendix (Volume 3)

238 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]


Error Messages

Error messages appear in the following three formats.


• A list display in the Error Status menu (7411)/Error Log menu (7412)
• Message boxes
• List based on the Error Information menu (9900)

Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status/Error Log


Menu
When an error occurs, the word “ERROR” appears in red on the menu title
button.
When “ERROR” is displayed, pressing the menu title button displays the Error
Status menu or Error Log menu.
When an error is current effective: the Error Status menu appears (see page
240).
When an error has already been cleared: the Error Log menu appears (see
page 242).

Appendix (Volume 3)
Menu title button

You can select whether or not to indicate the occurrence of an error by the
word “ERROR” shown on the menu title button, by setting [Error Popup] in
the Error Status menu or Error Log menu. For details, see “Error Status
menu” (page 240) or “Error Log menu” (page 242).

To display the error status or error log regardless of whether there


is currently an error

1 Carry out either of the following.


• Press the [DIAG] button of the top menu selection buttons.

Error Messages 239


• Press the menu page number button at the upper left of the menu screen,
to display the top menu window, then enter 7411 or 7412, and press
[Enter].

The Diagnostic menu appears.

2 Press VF1 ‘Error Info.’


The error information menu appears.

3 Press either of the following buttons.


HF1 ‘Error Status’: display the Error Status menu
HF2 ‘Error Log’: display the Error Log menu

Error Status menu


The Error Status menu lists currently occurring error information, listed with
the most recent information at the top.
When an error has been cleared, the error disappears from the list.
Appendix (Volume 3)

240 Error Messages


1 No
2 Date/Time
3 Device
4 Status

Appendix (Volume 3)
6 Error Popup button
5 Refresh Status button

a No
This is a sequential number assigned to the error status.

b Date/Time
This shows the date and time the error occurred.

c Device
This shows the device on which the error occurred.

d Status
This shows the details of the error.

e Refresh Status button


This refreshes the list display.

Error Messages 241


f Error Popup button
This selects whether or not to display “ERROR” on the menu title button when
an error occurs. This button is linked to the Error Popup button in the error log
menu.
On: if a device error occurs, display “ERROR” on the menu title button.
Off: if a device error occurs, do not display “ERROR” on the menu title button.

Error Log menu


The Error Log menu lists changes in the error status from the time that the
menu display in the menu operating section is started up, listed with the most
recent information at the top.
A maximum of 1024 error status changes appear, and when the number
exceeds 1024, the oldest items disappear from the list.
Appendix (Volume 3)

242 Error Messages


1 No
2 Date/Time
3 Device
4 Status

Appendix (Volume 3)
8 Error Popup button
7 All button
6 Plural button
5 Clear button

a No
This is a sequential number assigned to the items in the error log.

b Date/Time
This shows the date and time the status change occurred.

c Device
This shows the device on which the status change occurred.

d Status
This shows the details of the status change.

Error Messages 243


If you press on the list, this switches the display to reverse video, and selects
the item. You can also select items in the error log by turning the knob.

e Clear button
This deletes the selected error log item from the list.

f Plural button
When this is on, you can select more than one error log. To cancel the selection,
press once again to return to the normal display.

g All button
When this is on, all error log items are selected. To cancel the selection, press
once again to return to the normal display.

h Error Popup button


This selects whether or not to display “ERROR” on the menu title button when
an error occurs. This button is linked to the Error Popup button in the error
status menu.
On: if a device error occurs, display “ERROR” on the menu title button.
Off: if a device error occurs, do not display “ERROR” on the menu title button.

Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box


Corresponding to the content of the message, an icon appears.
Appendix (Volume 3)

244 Error Messages


Icon Title

Message

Appendix (Volume 3)
Icon Title Message Description
Activate The license key you entered is 7316.7: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
License invalid. Unit Config >License >License Management
Please check and enter again. In the above menu, since the entered
information was incorrect, the Activate License
procedure failed. Check the license key, and
enter again.
Activate License key was successfully 7316.7: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
License entered. Unit Config >License >License Management
The license will be activated In the above menu, the Activate License
after rebooting your system. procedure completed successfully.

Error Messages 245


Icon Title Message Description
Append [Append Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
Key Frame executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
FMx is not assigned to a user execute [Append Key Frame], but it failed
region. because the frame memory output (FMx) is not
assigned to a user region.
7331.4: Make the assignment in the
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >User1-8
Config menu, and try again.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is locked. execute [Append Key Frame] using a locked
(UserX) register (UserX region). Unlock the register.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is busy. execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
(UserX) (UserX region) into which files are being
loaded. Try again after file loading has finished.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is being execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
edited. (UserX) (UserX region) with which a keyframe creating
or editing operation is proceeding. Try again
after the keyframe operation has finished.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is full. execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
(UserX) (UserX region) in which no keyframe remains.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
Appendix (Volume 3)

executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to


Key Frame Register is not execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
active.(UserX) for which the appropriate region selection
button in the numeric keypad control block is
not selected. Try again after you select the
region selection button [UserX] in the numeric
keypad control block.
Backup Success!! 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, saving files into the external
hard disk completed successfully.

246 Error Messages


Icon Title Message Description
Backup No external HDD was found 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–2). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the external hard disk
could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Cannot access the partition 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–12). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the logical drives of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–20). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Cannot access the directory
execute [Backup] but the directory of the
(–21).
external hard disk could not be accessed.
The external HDD is busy 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–22). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] to the external hard disk
which was busy and could not be accessed. Try
again after you check that the access lamp of
the hard disk or the indicator of the menu is
turned off.
The external HDD is full (–32). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore

Appendix (Volume 3)
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] to the external hard disk
which does not have enough capacity.
Backup operation failed (–33) 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
Backup operation failed (–34).
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the file storing process
was not completed correctly.
Change The password has been 7317.1: Engineering Setup >System
Password successfully changed. >Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock
In the above menu, the password was
successfully changed.
Change Failed. 7317.1: Engineering Setup >System
Password The password was not >Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock
changed. In the above menu, the password was not
changed.

Error Messages 247


Icon Title Message Description
Create [Create Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
Key Frame executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
FMx is not assigned to a user execute [Create Key Frame], but it failed
region. because the frame memory output (FMx) is not
assigned to a user region.
7331.4: Make the assignment in the
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >User1-8
Config menu, and try again.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is locked. execute [Create Key Frame] using a locked
(UserX) register (UserX region). Unlock the register.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is busy. [Create Key Frame] using a register (UserX
(UserX) region) into which files are being loaded. Try
again after file loading has finished.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Key Frame Register is being execute [Create Key Frame] using a register
edited. (UserX) (UserX region) with which a keyframe creating
or editing operation is proceeding. Try again
after the keyframe operation has finished.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
There is no free Key Frame. execute [Create Key Frame] for a UserX region
(UserX) with insufficient usable keyframes.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be 2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
Appendix (Volume 3)

executed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to


Key Frame Register is not execute [Create Key Frame] using a register for
active. (UserX) which the appropriate region selection button in
the numeric keypad control block is not
selected. Try again after you select the region
selection button [UserX] in the numeric keypad
control block.
Deactivate The license will be deactivated 7316.7: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
License after rebooting your system. Unit Config >License >License Management
In the above menu, the Deactivate License
procedure completed successfully.
Disk Success!! 7317: Engineering Setup >System
Format >Maintenance
In the above menu, removable disk formatting
procedure completed successfully.
Failure. 7317: Engineering Setup >System
Make sure of the memory card. >Maintenance
In the above menu, removable disk formatting
procedure failed. Check that the memory card
is correctly inserted.

248 Error Messages


Icon Title Message Description
Error This operation is cancelled, 6211.1: Effect >Master Timeline >Store >Edit
because the register is locked. 6311.1: Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store
Please change the register >Edit
status to be unlocked first. 6411.1: Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall >Edit
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
assign to a register that is locked. Unlock the
register before carrying out the assignment.
The file was not able to be 7142.1: File >Shotbox, Macro >File Edit
read. In the above menu, [Off Line Edit] was pressed
but the selected file could not be read.
Select the file again, and press [Off Line Edit]
once more.
It was not possible to make a 7142.3: File >Shotbox, Macro >File Edit >Off
file. Line Edit
In the above menu, when storing, the file could
not be written.
Try the store once more.
Failed... 7162: File >All, External File >Import/Export
In the above menu, importing a file failed.
Check the format of the original file, and try
again.
The Source and the target are 7172: File >Configure >Unit ID Copy
the same directory. In the above menu, the same directory and ID
Please change the source or were selected for source and target.
the target directory. Select a different directory and ID.
File Frame Some requests are skipped. 7151: File >Frame Memory
Memory Following operation is not 7162: File >All, External File >Import/Export
permitted. In the above menu, an attempt was made to

Appendix (Volume 3)
— Loading that will cause load a file of a name already existing in the
duplicate register name. register.
File Open ERROR (01) 533X: Device >DDR/VTR menu
Status When an error is returned from the DDR/VTR,
ERROR (02) one of these messages appears, depending on
ERROR (FF): No target device the error number.
has been assigned Use Menu7355:Engineering Setup >DCU
>Serial Port Assign or
Menu7325.4:Engineering Setup >Panel
>Device Interface >Serial Port Assign to check
the device settings.
Format Success!! 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, formatting the external hard
disk completed successfully.

Error Messages 249


Icon Title Message Description
Format No external HDD was found 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–2). In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but the external hard disk
could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Format operation failed (–10). 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Format operation failed (–11).
execute [Format] but formatting the external
hard disk was not completed correctly.
Cannot access the partition 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–12). In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but the logical drives of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–20). In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but the directory of the
Cannot access the directory
external hard disk could not be accessed.
(–21).
The external HDD is busy 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–22). In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] of the external hard disk which
was busy and could not be accessed. Try again
after you check that the access lamp of the hard
disk or the indicator of the menu is turned off.
GPI Input Please set Target. 7325.1/2: Engineering Setup >Panel >Device
Interface >GPI Input
Please set Trigger Type.
Appendix (Volume 3)

7344.1/2: Engineering Setup >DME >Device


Please set Reg No. Interface >DME1 GPI Input
7344.5/6: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Please set Aux Bus No. Interface >DME2 GPI Input
Please set Src No. 7352/7352.1: Engineering Setup >DCU >GPI
Input Assign
Please set Pulse Width. In the above menus, when making a setting, a
Please set Pulse Timing. parameter setting value was incorrect. Check
the settings, and try again.
GPI Please set Target. 7325.3/4: Engineering Setup >Panel >Device
Output Interface >GPI Output
Please set Trigger Type. 7337.2/3: Engineering Setup >Switcher
Please set Reg No. >Device Interface >GPI Output
7337.4/5: Engineering Setup >Switcher
Please set Aux Bus No. >Device Interface >GPI Output
Please set Src No. 7344.3/4: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Interface >DME1 GPI Output
Please set Pulse Width. 7344.7/8: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Please set Pulse Timing. Interface >DME2 GPI Output
7354/7354.1: Engineering Setup >DCU >GPI
Output Assign
In the above menus, when making a setting, a
parameter setting value was incorrect. Check
the settings, and try again.

250 Error Messages


Icon Title Message Description
HDD Failure. 7317: Engineering Setup >System
Format HDD device is busy. >Maintenance
In order to complete HDD In the above menu, the hard disk formatting
format, System needs to be procedure failed.
restarted and formatted again. If the hard disk is functioning correctly, or in
System will be restarted, then some cases when there is damage to the disk,
please execute HDD format it may not be possible to format the disk
again. correctly in a single attempt. In such cases, it is
necessary to restart the system, and then carry
out formatting again.
Press [OK] to restart the system.
HDD Success!! 7317: Engineering Setup >System
Format System will be restarted. >Maintenance
In the above menu, the hard disk formatting
procedure completed successfully.
Press [OK] to restart the system.
Initial Initializing now... This popup message appears during menu
Read startup, while system information is being read
in.
Install No Task. 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Select a package on the list. Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, the package for installation
was not selected. Select a package to be
installed.
Install (1) Please select the MKS- 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
8010A package on the list Unit Config >Install
(2) Please select the MKS- In the above menu, the menu software
8010 package (not MKS- installation package does not match the model

Appendix (Volume 3)
8010A) on the list. on which it is to be installed.
(1) When the MKS-8010 installation package is
selected on the MKS-8010A
(2) When the MKS-8010A installation package
is selected on the MKS-8010
Some files are skipped. 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, some program files were
not installed, for example because the
hardware is not present. Check the skipped
files against the hardware configuration, to
confirm that the installation was completed
correctly.
Not Found. 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
The software package does not Unit Config >Install
exist on the removable disk. In the above menu, the software package to be
installed was not found. Check that the memory
card is correctly inserted, and try the installation
once more.
Install All processes have succeeded. 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, the installation procedure
completed successfully.

Error Messages 251


Icon Title Message Description
Install Target: MENU During software installation, an attempt to
Error uncompress a file failed.
Error code:
INSTALL_UNCOMPRESS_ER
ROR

Program file: XXXXX


Target: MENU During software installation, an error occurred
on the Switcher/DME/Panel Processor.
Error code: The displayed message is the same as shown
Error message received from in “Error Messages Shown in the Error
the Switcher/DME/Panel Information Menu” (page 256).
Processor

Program file: XXXXX


Install Target: XXXXX 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
error Error code: XXXXX Unit Config >Install
Program file: XXXXX In the above menu, if an error occurs during
installation, this shows:
1. Target: Target device for installation
2. Error code: Message returned by device
3. Program file: Program file name where error
occurred
Check the following, and try the installation
once more.
•Are you using the correct software package?
•Has it been downloaded correctly? (Retry
download)
Target: XXXXX 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Appendix (Volume 3)

Error code: Unit Config >Install


INSTALL_ERR_NOCONFIG In the above menu, when installing, an
No config file is found. installation settings file could not be read in
correctly.
Download another set of installation files, and
try the installation once more.
Target: XXXXX 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Error code: Unit Config >Install
INSTALL_ERR_NOPROGRAM In the above menu, when installing, a program
No program file is found. file included in the installation settings file could
not be read in correctly.
Download another set of installation files, and
try the installation once more.
Internal The user data partition of hard When starting up the menu system, an error
Error: disk drive is damaged, and all was found on the hard disk.
Data HDD data is lost. The hard disk drive In the 7317: Engineering Setup >System >
needs to be reformatted. Maintenance menu, execute [HDD Format].
Please execute HDD format on
Page 7317.
Internal Hard disk is incorrect or not
Error: formatted.
HDD is To format the hard disk, please
incorrect execute “HDD Format” on Page
7317.

252 Error Messages


Icon Title Message Description
Internal The system data partition of When starting up the menu system, an error
Error: hard disk drive is damaged. was found on the hard disk.
Temporary The hard disk drive needs to be In the 7317: Engineering Setup >System >
HDD reformatted. Please execute Maintenance menu, execute [HDD Format].
HDD format on Page 7317.
Please make sure to save all
data in the user data partition
of hard disk drive to any other
device or media, before
reformatted.
Invalid Empty... 2512: Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store
Name In the above menu, a Store was carried out
without specifying a name.
Alternatively:
71XX: File Menu
7171: File >Configure >Directory
In the above menu, when renaming a file or
creating a directory, the name was not entered.
Enter the name correctly.
The file exists already... 2512: Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store
In the above menu, the file name specified for a
store operation already exists in the switcher.
Specify a different name.
Loading Target File: XXXXX 7316.9: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Texture Failed to load target bmp file./ Unit Config >Texture Package
Pattern Illegal Name. In the above menu, an error occurred when
This operation is canceled. loading a texture file. Delete texture files with an
illegal size or illegal file name, then try again.
Target File: XXXXX

Appendix (Volume 3)
Failed to load target bmp file./
Illegal Size.
This operation is canceled.
Make Texture file: XXXXX 7316.9: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Package Not Found. Unit Config >Texture Package
This texture file does not exist In the above menu, when loading an already
on the removable disk. created texture package, a texture file within the
texture package was not found.
This operation is cancelled, 7316.9: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
because capacity is full. Unit Config >Texture Package
Please clear texture pattern. In the above menu, when making a texture
package, there was insufficient space on a
memory card.
Password Password Incorrect 7317.1: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock
In the above menu, the wrong password was
entered.
Enter the correct password.
Record Cannot be executed.Maximum 2523: Frame Memory >Clip >Record
number of clips are created. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Rec Start] but the number of recorded
clips had already reached its upper limit.

Error Messages 253


Icon Title Message Description
Refresh No external HDD was found 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
Status (–2). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the external hard
disk could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Cannot access the partition 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–12). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the logical drives
of the external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–20). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
Cannot access the directory In the above menus, an attempt was made to
(–21). execute [Refresh Status] but the directory of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
The external HDD is busy 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
(–22). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the external hard
disk was busy and could not be accessed. Try
again after you check that the access lamp of
the hard disk or the indicator of the menu is
Appendix (Volume 3)

turned off.
Rename Files currently used for 2546: Frame Memory >File >Rename
playback cannot be renamed. In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Rename], but a movie (clip) currently
being played back is included in the selected
files.
Restore Success!! 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, recalling a file from the
external hard disk was correctly done.

254 Error Messages


Icon Title Message Description
Restore No external HDD was found 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–2). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the external hard disk
could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Cannot access the partition 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–12). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the logical drives of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–20). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
Cannot access the directory
execute [Restore] but the directory of the
(–21).
external hard disk could not be accessed.
The external HDD is busy 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
(–22). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the external hard disk
was busy and could not be accessed. Try again
after you check that the access lamp of the hard
disk or the indicator of the menu is turned off.
No file was found (–40). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to

Appendix (Volume 3)
execute [Restore] but the file to be written into
the external hard disk was not found.
Restore operation failed (–42). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
Restore operation failed (–43).
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the recalling file from the
external hard disk was not completed correctly.
Restore Cannot restore the other signal 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
format file (–44). Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore], but a frame clip file with
ancillary data recorded in the different format
from that of the system is included in the
selected files.
Set Time/ Error: Wrong Format. 7317: Engineering Setup >System
Date >Maintenance
In the above menu, an incorrect date and time
was specified. Specify the date and time
correctly.
Warning No Switcher information When starting up the menu system, the
available. switcher is not present in the system
Please confirm “Network information. Check the Data LAN connections,
Configuration” on Page 7311. and in the 7311:Engineering Setup >System
>Network Config menu, retry [Auto Config].

Error Messages 255


Icon Title Message Description
Warning This operation will be 6211.1: Effect >Master Timeline >Store >Edit
cancelled, because the register 6311.1: Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store
is locked. >Edit
Please change the register 6411.1: Shotbox >Register >Store>Edit
status to be unlocked first. In the above menus, an attempt was made to
store in a locked register. Unlock the register
before carrying out the store.
Warning Illegal Network Config When starting up the menu system, if the
(System Information (Page 7311) system information read from the control panel
Config) is not correct, one of these messages, that
Illegal Panel Assign corresponds to the situation appears.
Information for Dual Simul Following the message, use 7311:Engineering
Operation (Page 7312) Setup >System >Network Config or
No Panel Assign Information 7312:Engineering Setup >System >System
(Page 7312) Config to retry the operation.
No Switcher Assign
Information (Page 7312)
No System Operation Mode
Information (Page 7312)
No DME Channel Information

a) MKS-8010A only

Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu


Appendix (Volume 3)

If a file transfer related error occurs, the Error Information menu appears to the
following error messages.
Error message Error description/measures
[Error] Packet Format Load/save the data again. Still then the message is displayed,
[Error] No Request contact a Sony service representative.
[Error] No Request File
[Error] Illegal Host
[Error] Not Supported
[Error] USB Access
[Error] Get File System Info
[Error] Copy Result
[Error] Remove Result
[Error] Move Result
[Error] Make Dir Result
[Error] Path Info
[Error] Dir Operation
[Error] Command Result

256 Error Messages


Error message Error description/measures
[Error] Transfer Result Load/save the data again. Still then the message is displayed,
[Error] Source File Name contact a Sony service representative.
[Error] Source File Open
[Error] Source File Read
[Error] Destination File Name
[Error] Destination File Open
[Error] Destination File Read
[Error] Destination File Write
[Error] Illegal Format
[Error] Edit Header
[Error] Local File Access
[Error] FTP Connect
[Error] FTP Busy
[Error] FTP Access
[Error] FTP No Result
[Error] FTP Put Command
[Error] FTP Delete
[Error] FTP Delete Command
[Error] FTP Delete Result
[Error] Control Table No Space
[Error] Control Table Same Name
[Error] No Queue
[Error] Resize BMP

Appendix (Volume 3)
[Error] Make Vector
[Error] Uncompress
[Error] Compress
[Error] Server Not Respond No reactions are returned from the processor. Check your
Data-LAN connections and the power source of the processor.
[Error] No Space There is not sufficient space in the memory card or hard disk.

Error Messages 257


Index

A Destination names 114 for DME 176


Device for switcher processor
Alarm adjustment 121
interface 104, 160, 175 161
Autoload function 27
setup 30 GPI output settings
Aux bus control enable/disable
Device interface 175 for control panel 107
166
Device management 43 for DCU 189
AUX bus remote panel 221
Diagnosis 225 for DME 178
AUX delegation button
Disk recorder for switcher processor
settings 87
settings 197, 198 164
shift operation 88
DME setup 169
Double-click sensitivity 117 I
B
Illegal color limiter 133, 171
Background E Initialization
transition flip-flop mode
Editing keyboard 109 hard disk 45
146
Effect Input reference signal 19
Beep 120
settings 113 Installation 30
Border
Engineering setup 11, 51,
processing order 150
123, 169, 179, 203, 221 J
Brightness adjustment 120
Error messages 239
Button Joystick sensitivity 117
Error Information menu
assignment settings 93
256
operation mode 116
Button assignments 93
error status/log 239 K
message box 244 Key
Extended VTR 200 auto drop 149
C External memory mode 150
Calibration 121 box setting 205 priority operation mode
Communications status 226 150
Control panel settings 54 F settings 148
Cross-point
Fader lever operations 147
assign tables 76
Fade-to-black function 146 L
Index

button shift operation 79


Formatting a memory card 44 Link
settings 75
Formatting the hard disk 45 cross-point buttons 153,
Cross-point assign tables 82
Function 155
Custom mode 24
assignment user key transition 158
preference buttons 93 M/E banks 157
D links 153
Date and time 43
DCU G
serial port settings 110
GPI input settings
setup 180
for control panel 104
for DCU 183

258 Index
Locking the setup data 46 Region Source name 114
assigning 62 Source signal name 80
M Reset 29 Split
Reset/initialization 29 fader setting 146
Macro Resume mode 24 Spotlighting settings
assignment of operation Router destination 58 user texture patterns 35
buttons 67 Router interface settings 204 Start-up state 26
execution mode 118 Router interface/tally setup Switcher configuration 125
Mask processing order 150 203 Switcher setup 123
Memory card formatting 44 System
Menu shortcut assignment maintenance 43
memory recall button 102 S
settings 15
user preference buttons Safe title settings 143
97 Screen
MKS-8080/8082 saver 120 T
setting status 224 SCU editor panel port 109 Tally
simple connection 222 Serial copy settings 215
Monitor output 173 port settings 192 generation settings 212
tally setting 219 group settings 208
N Setup TBC window center position
for control panel 54 171
Network settings 14 for DCU 180 Through mode settings 142
for the whole switcher Touch panel calibration 121
O system 13 Trackball sensitivity 117
On-air tally 113 locking the data 46 Transition
Operation mode setting 126 Setup data saving/recalling 25 mode 146
Operation settings 112 Show key function 149 preview mode setting 145
Side flags 85
aspect ratio 131 U
P assigning a cross-point
Parallel button 85 USB driver reloading 45
input settings 181 auto crop 131 User region setting 128
output settings 187 auto side flags 131 User-defined settings 27
tally settings 217 cropping 131
Pattern limit 151 Signal format setting 18 V
P-Bus devices Signal input settings Vertical blanking interval

Index
control mode setting 109 for DME 170 adjustment 142
PGM/PST for switcher processor Video
logical assignment to M/E 132 clip adjustment 142
129 Signal output settings switching settings 145
Power-on state 24 for DME 173 switching timing 126
Preset color mix setting 147 for switcher processor Video process memory 148
Primary setting 44 140 VTR
Software operation button
R installation 30 assignment 65
setting required 32
Reference
phase adjustment 126

Index 259
W
Wipe
settings 148
Wiring settings 209

X
XPT HOLD button operation
mode 151
Index

260 Index
The material contained in this manual consists of infor-
mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equip-
ment described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur-
pose other than the operation or maintenance of the
equipment described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
Sony Corporation
MVS-6000 Printed in Japan
System (SY) 2009.03 13
4-136-352-01 (1) Printed on recycled paper. ©2009

You might also like